224
COMAND Operator's Manual

COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

  • Upload
    phungtu

  • View
    240

  • Download
    4

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

COMANDOperator's Manual

Page 2: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free
Page 3: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Welcome to COMAND!Please make yourself familiar with yourCOMAND control unit and read theinstructions in this manual before operatingthe COMAND system. This will help you derivea greater benefit from the system. Please alsofollow the instructions and warningscontained in this manual. Ignoring them couldresult in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others.Depending on model, version andconfiguration, your COMAND systemequipment may differ. Therefore, you mayfind explanations for optional equipment notinstalled in your vehicle. If you have anyquestions about the operation of anyequipment, your authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter will be glad to demonstrate the properprocedures.We continuously strive to improve ourproduct and ask for your understanding thatwe reserve the right to make changes indesign and equipment. Therefore,information, illustrations and descriptions inthis manual might differ from the equipmentinstalled in your vehicle. As such, theinformation, illustrations and descriptionscontained in this manual may not bereasonably relied upon in making any claimswith respect to the actual performance of theproduct.These operating instructions form an integralpart of the vehicle and should thereforealways be kept inside the vehicle and passedon to the new owner if the vehicle is sold.We extend our best wishes for many miles ofsafe, pleasurable driving.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCA Daimler Company

Page 4: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free
Page 5: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 14

At a Glance .......................................... 17

System Settings .................................. 39

Navigation ........................................... 47

Telephone ............................................ 97

Audio .................................................. 121

Video .................................................. 155

Rear Seat Entertainment .................. 165

Voice Control ..................................... 185

Tele Aid .............................................. 215

Content 3

Page 6: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

1, 2, 3 ...911 emergency call .......................... 102911 emergency call system ..... 102, 216

AAccepting incoming calls ........... 29, 109Active partitions in USB devices ..... 152Address book

adding destinations to ..................... 94creating new entries ...................... 112deleting entries from ............. 105, 114details ............................................ 115dialing numbers from ..................... 116downloading contents ................... 117editing entries ................................ 115Home address ................................. 91menu overview .............................. 112navigating to destinations in .......... 116opening .......................................... 112saving call list entries in ................ 107searching ....................................... 113selecting an entry .......................... 112voice controlwith ....................... 116, 197, 207, 211see My address (destination)

Address of destination (See alsoDestinations)

entering with voice commands ...... 192home address .................................. 71stopover destinations ...................... 73

Alphabetical track selection ............ 152Alternative Route function ................. 86Announcement phase (drivingmaneuvers) .......................................... 81Announcements, navigation

see Navigation announcements Announcements, traffic (real-time) . . . 90Answering incoming calls .......... 29, 109Audio .......................................... 122, 174

announcements ............................... 85CD, DVD, and MP3 ........................ 131loudness .......................................... 34phone volume ................................ 101read-out ........................................... 34rear seat entertainment system ..... 170sound settings ................................. 35

steering wheel operation ................. 28surround sound ................................ 36turning off ........................................ 34voice control .................................. 186wireless headsets .......................... 168see Muting audio see Navigation announcements see Read-aloud announcements see Volume

Audio Aux (auxiliary) main system .................................. 153switching to ................................... 153voice commands for ...................... 205

Audio format audio playback ............................... 143DVD Video ..................................... 162rear seat entertainment system ..... 176

Audio menu ........................................ 122Authorizing Bluetooth devices ........... 99Automatic (display)

main display ..................................... 42rear seat entertainment system ..... 172

Automatic picture switch-off ........... 156Auxiliary (Aux) operation

main audio ..................................... 153main video ..................................... 163rear seat entertainmentsystem ........................... 168, 170, 181voice commands for ...................... 205voice control with .......................... 211

Avoid settings for route guidance ..... 55

BBack button ......................................... 24Backward track skip ......................... 141Balance (sound), setting ..................... 35Bass setting

main system .................................... 35rear seat entertainment system ..... 171

Batteries for rear seatentertainment .................................... 169Bit rates for digital audio .................. 133Blocked areas for route guidance ...... 60Blocking routes ................................... 85Bluetooth® ........................................... 44

activating phone .............................. 99

4 Index

Page 7: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

downloading address bookcontent .......................................... 117external authorization .................... 100making calls ..................................... 98switching on/off .............................. 45

Brightness setting main function display ....................... 41main video ..................................... 160rear seat entertainmentsystem ........................... 173, 179, 183

Browsing listssee Predictive speller see Searching

CCalculating routes

see Route guidance Calling (See also Telephone)

dialing with keypad ........................ 109emergency calls ..................... 102, 216history of calls ............................... 106redialing ................................... 30, 110using address book entries ............ 116using phone bookentries ............................. 29, 103, 110voice control with .......................... 199see Call lists

Call lists ............................................. 106calling number in ........................... 110deleting .......................................... 109displaying details ........................... 107saving entries in addressbook .............................................. 107selecting ........................................ 106

Call waiting function ......................... 111Camera, rear view ............................... 44Camera angle, DVD video ................. 181Camera angle, DVD Video ................. 162Canceling entry into COMAND ........... 32Categories

points of interest (POIs) ................... 76satellite radio ......................... 129, 201stopover destinations ...................... 73

CD/DVD discs Loading .......................................... 134

CD/DVD drive, rear seatentertainment .................................... 168

multiuser operation ....................... 171CD Audio

rear seat entertainment system ..... 171CD Audio, main vehicle ..................... 131

ejecting discs ................................. 136fast forward and reverse ................ 142Gracenote® Media Database ......... 143handling and care of discs ............. 134loading discs .................................. 134selecting a track ............................ 141starting playback ........................... 139stopping or pausing playback ........ 140voice control with .................. 203, 209

Channel selection (satellite radio) ..... 28voice commands for ...................... 202

Chapter selection (DVD) main video ..................................... 160rear seat entertainment system ..... 179

Character entry ................................... 31City center, selecting asdestination ................................... 67, 194City of destination, selecting ............. 64Clear button ......................................... 25Color video settings

main video ..................................... 160rear seat entertainmentsystem ................................... 179, 183

COMAND control unit ...................................... 20

COMAND, about basic functions ................................ 34operation of ..................................... 30resetting to factory settings ............. 45switching on/off .............................. 34

COMAND components ........................ 18COMAND controller ............................. 23COMAND Control System ................... 18Commands for voice control ............ 205

for address book ................... 198, 207for CD, DVD, MP3 .................. 203, 209for navigation ........................ 192, 206for phone operation ....................... 206for radio and satellite radio .... 201, 208general commands ........................ 205

Compass .............................................. 62

Index 5

Page 8: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Contactssee Address book

Contrast setting main video ..................................... 160rear seat entertainmentsystem ................................... 179, 183

Copyright, audio ................................ 133Crosshair position in map .................. 54

saving in Last Destinations .............. 95Current location of vehicle

see Vehicle location (current) Current street, displaying ................... 58Customer Assistance Center,calling ................................................. 217

DData for navigation

see Updating map software Daylight Savings Time ........................ 41Day mode (display)

main display ..................................... 42rear seat entertainment system ..... 172

Deregistering Bluetooth devices ..... 101Destination input ................................. 62

entering a city .................................. 64Entering a house number ................. 68from destination memory ................. 71from Last Destinations ..................... 72from map ......................................... 72Selecting a state/province .............. 63speed restriction on ................... 50, 72Stopover .......................................... 73via address ...................................... 63

Destination memory (See also LastDestinations) ................................. 71, 91

adding stopover destination ............ 73choosing destination from ............... 71home address in .............................. 91saving destinations to .............. 93, 196voice control for ............................ 196

Destination reached message ............ 83Destinations

adding to address book ................... 94displaying information about ........... 86distance to, displaying ..................... 58guidance to ...................................... 80moving map to ................................. 55

saving to destinationmemory ................................... 93, 196Search & Send service ................... 217selecting point of interest ................ 74stopover destinations ...................... 73voice control with .......................... 192see Route guidance

Detour function ................................... 85Dialed calls, list of ............................. 106Dialing telephone

see Calling Dialog

see Voice control Disc handling ....................... 48, 134, 156Disk drive, rear seat entertainment

multiuser operation ....................... 171Disk drive for rear seatentertainment system ...................... 168Display, main ....................................... 18

automatic DVD picture switch-off . . 156brightness setting ............................ 41menus ........................................ 25, 30rear view camera ............................. 44settings for ...................................... 41switching on/off .............................. 40with voice command ...................... 188

Display, mapsee Map display

Display screens, rear seatentertainment .................................... 167

hiding or showing menus ............... 178multiuser operation ....................... 171selecting for headset ..................... 169selecting for remote ...................... 167

Distance to destination, displaying ... 58District, selecting as destination ....... 67

with voice commands .................... 194Downloading address bookcontent ............................................... 117Driving maneuvers .............................. 81DRM (Digital Rights Management) ... 148DTMF tone transmission .................. 111DVD Audio, main vehicle .................. 131

ejecting discs ................................. 136fast forward and reverse ................ 142handling and care of discs ....... 48, 134loading discs .................................. 134

6 Index

Page 9: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Notes about ................................... 133pause function ............................... 140selecting a track ............................ 141setting audio format ...................... 143starting playback ........................... 139stopping or pausing playback ........ 140voice control with .................. 203, 210

DVD Audio, rear seatentertainment .................................... 170DVD changer

loading ............................................. 49DVD menu operation ................ 160, 180DVD playback conditions ................. 157DVD Video .......................................... 156

automatic picture switch off .......... 156control menu, displaying/hiding .... 158DVD menu ..................................... 160fast forward/rewind ...................... 159functional restrictions .................... 157handling and care of discs ............. 156interactive content ........................ 162menu system ................................. 158notes on ........................................ 156operating DVD menu ............. 160, 180picture settings .............................. 160rear seat entertainment system ..... 177safety notes ................................... 156selecting film/track ....................... 160stop function ................................. 159submenu overview ......................... 157switching to ................................... 158voice control with .................. 204, 211

Dynamic routing ............................ 55, 91

EEjecting discs, rear seatentertainment system ...................... 174Ejecting discs and memory cards

main audio system ......................... 136Emergency phone calls ............ 102, 216Ending active phone calls ................. 111Ending calls .......................................... 29External audio or video devices

main system .......................... 153, 163rear seat entertainment system ..... 181voice control with .......................... 205

FFader (sound), setting ......................... 35Fast forward

audio playback ............................... 142rear seat entertainmentsystem ................................... 175, 178video playback ............................... 159

Film selection, DVD ................... 160, 179Folders

MP3 mode, selecting ..................... 142rear seat MP3 operation ................ 175

Formats, audio .................................. 132Forward track skip ............................ 141Full-screen map ................................... 54

GGeo-coordinates, displaying ............... 58Global voice control commands ...... 187Google Maps® .................................... 217GPS reception ...................................... 51

displaying geo-coordinates .............. 58Gracenote®

Media database ............................. 143GSM network coverage ....................... 98

HHands-free microphone, switchingon/off ................................................. 111Hanging up (phone calls) .................. 111Hard disk drive

voice control with .................. 204, 210HD Radio™ ......................................... 123Headsets, rear seatentertainment ........................... 168, 170Help with voice control, general ...... 213Highway information, displaying ....... 59Highway junctions, selecting asdestination ........................................... 69Home address in destinationmemory .......................................... 71, 91

deleting ............................................ 94setting or changing .......................... 91

House numbers, entering fordestination ................................... 68, 195

Index 7

Page 10: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

IIncident (traffic notification) .............. 87Incoming calls

answering ................................ 29, 109rejecting .................................. 29, 109

Individualization of voice control ...... 42Information calls ............................... 217Initiating phone calls

see Calling Input of navigation destination .......... 62

speed restriction on ................... 50, 72Input speller

settings for address book .............. 108Inserting disk, rear seatentertainment .................................... 173Installing map data ............................. 49Interactive content on DVDs .... 162, 181Interrupting audio playback ............. 140Interrupting video playback ............. 159Intersection (selecting) .................... 194iPod® devices ..................................... 147

connecting to ................................. 147playback options ............................ 152playlists and folders ....................... 150selecting tracks ............................. 150

KKeypad, entering characters with ..... 32

LLane recommendations ...................... 83Language settings ............................... 44

DVD Video ............................. 162, 181rear seat entertainment system ..... 172

Last Destinations ............................... 95adding stopover destination ............ 73adding to memory ............................ 93choosing destination from ............... 72deleting destination from ................. 95saving current vehicleposition ...................................... 54, 95voice control for ............................ 196

Listing address book contents ........ 200Loading CDs and DVDs

main system .................................. 134rear seat entertainment system ..... 173

Local voice control commands ........ 187Location of vehicle, current

see Vehicle location (current) LOGIC7® Surround Sound system ..... 36Loudness

see Volume

MMagazine compartments, DVDchanger .............................................. 134Main function display

see Display, main Main function menus

list of ................................................ 19navigation mode, switching to ......... 53opening ............................................ 30

Main menu, overview of ..................... 19Maneuver phase (drivingmaneuvers) .......................................... 82Map display (See also Navigation) ..... 56

blocked area for route ..................... 60destination information .................... 86driving maneuver preparation .......... 81entering destination on .................... 72entering POI from ............................ 80general information, at bottom ........ 58hiding crosshairs .............................. 55setting scale .................................... 54topographic map .............................. 59traffic information ............................ 58traffic lane recommendations .......... 83traffic notifications in ....................... 87updating map software .................... 48

Measurement units, navigation ......... 52Media interface ................................. 147

data formats .................................. 148voice control with .................. 204, 211

Media Interface connecting devices ........................ 148selecting category/playlist/folder . 150selecting files ................................. 150switching to ................................... 149

Memory cards starting playback ........................... 139voice control with .................. 204, 210

8 Index

Page 11: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Menus, COMAND how to operate ................................ 31list of ................................................ 19

Menus, steering wheel ........................ 25Messages

during voice command .................. 188for driving maneuvers ...................... 81for traffic lane recommendations ..... 83real-time traffic reports .................... 90

Missed calls, list of ........................... 106Missed navigationannouncements, requesting .............. 85Mobile telephone

see Telephone MP3 mode, main vehicle .................. 132

fast forward and reverse ................ 142selecting a track ............................ 141selecting folders ............................ 142starting playback ........................... 139stopping or pausing playback ........ 140voice control with .................. 203, 210

MP3 operation, rear seatentertainment .................................... 174MP3 players ....................................... 147

playback options ............................ 152playlists and folders ....................... 150selecting active partition ............... 152selecting tracks ............................. 150

MP3 storage medium ........................ 132Multifunction display .......................... 26

Audio menu ..................................... 28Menus and submenus ...................... 26

Multifunction steering wheel ............. 25voice control button ....................... 187

Multisession CDs ............................... 132Music register ................................... 144

Deleting ......................................... 146Folder functions ............................. 146Memory space info ........................ 146Playback options ........................... 147recording ....................................... 145switching on .................................. 144voice control with .................. 204, 210

Muting audio main system .................................... 34navigation announcements ........ 34, 85rear seat entertainment system ..... 168

My address (destination) .............. 71, 91deleting from destination memory ... 94setting or changing .......................... 91

NNames

for MP3 files and folders ................ 132for saved destinations ...................... 93searching for POIs by ....................... 75

Navigation (See also Routeguidance) ............................................. 48

audio fadeout ...................... 35, 60, 85basic settings ................................... 55destination input .............................. 62destination memory ......................... 91displaying/hiding menu system ....... 54general information .......................... 51last destinations .............................. 95map display ..................................... 56menu overview ................................. 52operational readiness ...................... 51POI input .......................................... 74scrolling the map ............................. 54setting map scale ............................. 54steering wheel operation ................. 26switching to navigation mode .......... 53to address book destinations ........ 116traffic messages .............................. 87updating map software .................... 48voice control with .................. 191, 206

Navigationannouncements .................... 81, 85, 186

during active phone calls ................. 85switching on/off ........................ 34, 85volume of ......................................... 35

NAVI menu ..................................... 26, 52Near destination, entering POI .......... 74Network coverage for phone calls ..... 98Night mode (display)

main display ..................................... 42Normal track sequence .................... 144

rear seat entertainment system ..... 176Number keypad

entering characters with .................. 32Numbers, entering with voicecommand ........................................... 188

Index 9

Page 12: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

OOff-map routes .................................... 83Off-road routes .................................... 83Operating example .............................. 33Orientation of map .............................. 56Outgoing calls

see Calling

PPartitions in USB devices ................. 152Passcodes for Bluetooth phones ..... 100Pausing playback

main audio ..................................... 140main video ..................................... 160rear seat entertainmentsystem ................................... 176, 178

PCMCIA memory card ejecting .......................................... 137loading ........................................... 136

Phonesubmenu ........................................ 102switching to phone mode .............. 102see Telephone

Phone book ........................................ 103adding entries ................................ 104deleting from ................................. 105dialing from ..................... 29, 104, 110editing entries ................................ 105selecting entry ............................... 103voice control with .......................... 190

Phone calls emergency ............................. 102, 216lists of ............................................ 106making ........................................... 109see Calling

Phone menu ....................................... 102Phone number search for POIs .......... 75Picture format

main video ..................................... 160rear seat entertainmentsystem ................................... 179, 183

Picture settings for video main system .................................. 160rear seat entertainmentsystem ................................... 179, 183

Playback options iPods, MP3 players, and USBdevices .......................................... 152Music Register ............................... 147rear seat entertainment system ..... 176track sequence .............................. 144

Playing audiofast forward and reverse ................ 142for rear seat entertainment . . . 170, 173headsets ........................................ 168muting ............................................. 34options for playback ...................... 144selecting track ............................... 141see Muting audio see Selecting audio track

POI input choosing a category ......................... 75local area of destination .................. 74vicinity of location ............................ 75vicinity of specific location ............... 75

Points of interest (POIs) adding stopover destination ............ 73selecting as destination ................... 74stopover destinations ...................... 73voice control for ............................ 195ZAGAT® Rating Service .................... 79

Possible lane, defined ......................... 83Predictive speller ................................ 31

destination memory list ................... 71for points of interest (POIs) ........ 76, 78house number list ............................ 68street junction list ............................ 69street list ......................................... 67zip code list ...................................... 66

Preparation phase (drivingmaneuvers) .......................................... 81Province of destination,selecting ...................................... 63, 192

RRadio

HD Radio™ .................................... 123satellite radio ................................. 123selecting stations .......................... 202

10 Index

Page 13: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

switching to ................................... 123voice control with .................. 201, 209

Random track playback .................... 144rear seat entertainment system ..... 176

Read-aloud announcements ............... 87navigation ........................................ 85settings for ...................................... 42see Navigation announcements see Traffic messages

Read CD Database function .............. 143Reading out address book ................ 200Real-time traffic notifications ............ 87Rear audio option .............................. 122Rear compartment socket ................ 169Rear seat entertainment

active source from COMAND ......... 182Rear seat entertainmentsystem ................................................ 166

audio operation .............................. 173Aux operation ................................ 181basic functions .............................. 170system settings ............................. 172video operation .............................. 177

Rear view camera, switching on/off ......................................................... 44Received calls, list of ........................ 106Receive volume (phone) ................... 101Recommended lane, defined .............. 83Redialing telephone ............................ 30

voice control for ............................ 191Registering mobile phones ................. 99Rejecting incoming calls ............ 29, 109Remote control, rear seatentertainment .................................... 167

batteries for ................................... 170Removing discs and memorycards ................................................... 136Rewind (reverse)

main audio playback ...................... 142rear seat entertainment system ..... 175video playback ....................... 159, 178

Roadside assistance ......................... 216Route calculation ................................ 70

history of, saving .............................. 95points of interest (POIs) ............. 79, 80with home address .......................... 92see Last Destinations

Route guidance .............................. 60, 80after vehicle transport ..................... 51blocked areas .................................. 60canceling or resuming ...................... 85detours and alternative routes ......... 85driving maneuvers ........................... 80lane recommendations .................... 83navigationannouncements ........... 34, 81, 85, 186off-map routes ................................. 83off-road routes ................................. 83Route browser ................................. 86saving calculations for ..................... 95stopover destinations ...................... 73traffic lane recommendations .......... 83traffic messages .............................. 87voice control for ............................ 196with home address .......................... 92see Last Destinations

Route mode .......................................... 55

SSatellite radio .................................... 127

category selection ................. 129, 202Displaying information ................... 131Memory functions .......................... 130Selecting a channel ....................... 129selecting channels ......................... 202Switching on .................................. 128Updating channels ......................... 131voice control with .................. 201, 209

Saving route calculationssee Last Destinations

Scale of navigation map, setting ....... 54Scene selection

main system .................................. 160rear seat entertainment system ..... 179

Scrolling navigation map .................... 54Search & Send ................................... 217Search & Send service ...................... 217Searching (See also Predictive speller)

address book ......................... 199, 200audio tracks ................................... 141for mobile phones ............................ 99phone book ...................................... 29points of interest (POIs) ................... 76see Track selection (audio)

Index 11

Page 14: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Selecting audio track CD, DVD, or MP3 ........................... 141normal and random options ........... 144rear seat entertainment system ..... 175steering wheel operation ................. 28voice commands for ...................... 204

Selecting from lists ............................. 33Settings for COMAND system ............ 40

resetting to factory settings ............. 45Skipping to tracks

see Track selection (audio) Sound

see Audio Speed restriction on destinationinput ............................................... 50, 72Speed restriction on video display . . 156Speller .................................................. 31

destination memory list ................... 71for points of interest (POIs) ........ 76, 78house number list ............................ 68street junction list ............................ 69street list ......................................... 67zip code list ...................................... 66

Spelling with voice command .......... 188Standard Time ..................................... 41State of destination,selecting ...................................... 63, 192Station selection (radio)

voice commands for ...................... 202Steering wheel ............................ 25, 187Stopover destinations ......................... 73

deleting ............................................ 74Stopping playback

main audio ..................................... 140main video ..................................... 159rear seat entertainmentsystem ................................... 176, 178

Storage media handling ..... 48, 134, 156Street junctions, selecting asdestination ........................................... 69Street of destination,selecting ...................................... 67, 194Subtitles for DVD Video ............ 162, 181Surround sound ................................... 36Symbols in this book .......................... 14System language

for input speller ............................. 108

System Settings menu ........................ 40reset to factory settings ................... 45

TTele Aid ............................................... 216Telephone (See also Calling)

activating ......................................... 99address book ................................. 111Bluetooth interface .......................... 99call lists ......................................... 106call waiting function ....................... 111functional restrictions ...................... 99general information .......................... 98incoming calls .......................... 29, 109loudness of calls .............................. 35making calls ................................... 109navigation announcements duringcalls ................................................. 85operating options ............................. 98phone book .................................... 103prerequisites .................................... 99setting transmit and receivevolume ........................................... 101steering wheel operation ................. 29Tele Aid .......................................... 216voice control with .......................... 206

Telephone booksee Phone book

Telephone calls emergency ............................. 102, 216lists of ............................................ 106making ........................................... 109see Calling

Tel menu ............................................... 29Terminating phone calls ................... 111Time format ......................................... 41Time of arrival, displaying .................. 58Time settings ....................................... 41Time zone

setting ............................................. 41Town, selecting as destination ........ 193Track information

rear seat entertainment ................. 177Track names ...................................... 132Track selection (audio)

CD, DVD, or MP3 ........................... 141iPods and MP3 players .................. 152

12 Index

Page 15: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

normal and random options ........... 144rear seat entertainment system ..... 175steering wheel operation ................. 28voice commands for ...................... 204

Track selection (video) ..... 160, 161, 179voice commands for ...................... 204

Traffic lane recommendations ........... 83Traffic messages ................................. 87Traffic symbol information ................. 90Training for voice control ................... 42Transmit volume (phone) ................. 101Treble setting

main system .................................... 35rear seat entertainment system ..... 171

Troubleshooting voice control .................................. 211

UUnits of measurement, navigation .... 52Updating Gracenote® MediaDatabase ............................................ 143Updating map software ...................... 48USB devices

connecting to ................................. 147playback options ............................ 152playlists and folders ....................... 150selecting active partition ............... 152selecting tracks ..................... 150, 152

VVehicle location (current)

displaying ......................................... 58GPS reception .................................. 51moving map to ................................. 55saving in Last Destinations ........ 54, 95

Video .................................................. 156control menu, displaying/hiding .... 158handling and care of discs ............. 156interactive content ........................ 162operating DVD menu ............. 160, 180picture settings .............................. 160rear seat entertainment system ..... 177voice control with .......................... 211

Video Aux (auxiliary) main system .................................. 163rear seat entertainment system ..... 168

Voice control ..................................... 186canceling the dialog ....................... 188command list ................................. 205creating voice names ..................... 198general operation .......................... 186help function .................................. 213interrupting the dialog ................... 187operating safety ............................. 186settings ............................................ 42starting the dialog .......................... 187switching help screen on or off ........ 42training for voice recognition ........... 42troubleshooting ............................. 211with address book ......... 116, 197, 211with DVD changer .......................... 203with external equipment (Aux) ....... 205with navigation .............................. 191with phone ..................................... 188with radio and satellite radio ......... 201

Voice mail, voice control for ............ 191Voice names, creating ...................... 198Volume (loudness)

COMAND ......................................... 34external audio sources .......... 153, 163mobile phones ............................... 101muting COMAND ............................. 34navigation announcements ........ 35, 85phone calls ...................................... 35voice command ............................. 188wireless headsets .......................... 169

WWireless headsets, rear seatentertainment .................................... 168

basic operation .............................. 171batteries for ................................... 170muting audio playback ................... 168

YYahoo Local Maps® ........................... 217

ZZAGAT® Rating Service ....................... 79Zip code of destination, selecting ...... 65

Index 13

Page 16: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Where to find it

This operator's manual has been designed tohelp you use your COMAND control unit in allsituations. Since not all models have thesame standard equipment, your COMANDsystem equipment may deviate from somedescriptions and illustrations.

IndexesContent and keyword indexes are intended tohelp you find information quickly.

At a GlanceHere you will find an overview of thecomponents of COMAND. Then you will findexamples illustrating how to operateCOMAND and information on the basicfunctions. If you are operating a COMAND forthe first time or have rented the vehicle, youshould first read this chapter.

System SettingsHere you will find all the importantinformation regarding the system settings ofthe COMAND.

NavigationHere you will find detailed informationregarding the following topics:RSetting options for the map display and the

route calculationRDestination inputRPOI inputRRoute guidanceRTraffic informationRDestination memory

TelephoneThe telephone functions are described here.You will also find information on the addressbook.

AudioHere you will find all information regardingthe audio function and its Radio, SatRadio,CD-audio/DVD audio/MP3, Music Register,Media Interface and Audio Aux modes.

VideoHere you will find all information regardingthe video system.

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)In this chapter the Rear Seat Entertainmentis explained.

Voice ControlHere you will find information about operatingseveral COMAND functions via Voice Control.

Tele AidHere you will find information on how to useTele Aid and the Search & Send function.

Symbols

Trademarks®:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.RLogic 7® is a registered trademark of

Harman International Industries,Incorporated

14 Introduction

Page 17: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RMicrosoft® is a registered trademark ofMicrosoft Corporation in the United Statesand other countriesRSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks

of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.RWindows media® is a registered trademark

of Microsoft Corporation in the UnitedStates and other countries

You will find the following symbols in theseoperating instructions:

G Warning!Warning notices draw your attention tohazards that may endanger your health or life,or the health or life of others.

! Highlights hazards that may result indamage to your COMAND.

i Helpful hints or further information youmay find useful.

X This symbol points toinstructions for you to follow. Anumber of these symbolsappearing in successionindicates a multiple-stepprocedure.

O The continuation symbol marksan interrupted procedure whichwill be continued on the nextpage.

(Y page 11) This symbol tells you where tolook for further information onthis subject.

Display Messages, menu items or softkey names appearing in theCOMAND color display areprinted in the style shown here.

Operating Safety

G WarningAny alterations of electronic components orsoftware can cause malfunctions.Radio, satellite radio, amplifier, DVD changer,navigation module, telephone and VoiceControl systems are interconnected.Therefore, if one of the components is notoperational, or has not been removed/replaced properly, the function of othercomponents could be impaired.Such conditions might seriously impair theoperating safety of your vehicle.We recommend to have any service work onelectronic components carried out by anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WarningIn order to avoid distraction which could leadto an accident, the driver should enter systemsettings while the vehicle is at a standstill, andoperate the system only when permitted byroad, weather and traffic conditions.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your car covers adistance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) everysecond.COMAND supplies you with information tohelp you select your route more easily andguide you conveniently and safely to yourdestination. For safety reasons, weencourage the driver to stop the vehicle in asafe place before answering or placing a call,or consulting the COMAND screen to readnavigational maps, instructions, ordownloaded information.

G WarningWhile the navigation system providesdirectional assistance, the driver must remainfocused on safe driving behavior, especiallyattention to traffic and street signs, andshould utilize the system’s audio cues whiledriving.

Introduction 15

Z

Page 18: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

The navigation system does not supply anyinformation on stop signs, yield signs, trafficregulations or traffic safety rules. Theirobservance always remains in the driver’spersonal responsibility. DVD maps do notcover all areas nor all routes within an area.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

G WarningChange or modification not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's authority tooperate this equipment.

! Note: This equipment has been testedand found to comply with the limits for aClass A digital device, pursuant to Part 15of the FCC Rules. These limits are designedto provide reasonable protection againstharmful interference when the equipmentis operated in a commercial environment.This equipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, if notinstalled and used in accordance with theinstruction manual, may cause harmfulinterference to radio communications.

G WarningThis equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for uncontrolledequipment and meets the FCC radiofrequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines inSupplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RFenergy that is deemed to comply withoutmaximum permissive exposure evaluation(MPE). But it is desirable that it should beinstalled and operated with at least 8 inches(20 cm) and more between the radiator and a

person's body (excluding extremities: hands,wrists, feet and legs.)

16 Introduction

Page 19: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

COMAND Control System ................... 18Multifunction Steering Wheel ............ 25Operating COMAND ............................ 30Basic Functions of COMAND .............. 34

17

At a

Gla

nce

Page 20: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

COMAND Control System

E-Class illustrated

Function Page

1 COMAND display 18

2 COMAND control unit withDVD changer 20

3 COMAND controller 23

Vehicle Equipmenti This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

Components of COMAND COMAND comprises:Rthe COMAND displayRthe COMAND control unit with DVD

changerRthe COMAND controller with the Back and

Clear buttonYou can use COMAND to operate thefollowing main functions:Rthe navigation systemRthe audio function with the radio, SatRadio,

disc (CD audio, DVD audio or MP3 mode),PCMCIA memory card (MP3 mode), MusicRegister and Audio Aux modesRthe telephone and the address book

functionRDVD VideoRsystems settingsYou can call up the main functions:Rusing the corresponding function buttonsRusing the main function line in the

COMAND display

COMAND Display i Do not touch the COMAND display. The

display has a very sensitive high-glosssurface; there is a risk of scratching. Shouldthe display need cleaning, use a mildcleaning agent and a soft, antistatic, lint-free cloth. Commercially available alcoholand ammonia-free TFT or LCD cleaners arerecommended.

The COMAND display shows the functioncurrently selected and its associated menus.The COMAND display is divided into severalareas.The radio display is shown in the example.

18 COMAND Control SystemAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 21: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Example: Audio main function display1 Status line2 Main function line3 Main area4 Submenu lineStatus line 1 displays the time and thecurrent telephone status.With the main function line 2 you can selectthe main function.Select the function with the COMANDcontroller (Y page 23).In the example, the audio main function is setto radio mode and the main area 3 is active.

i The arrangement of the menus can vary,depending on the equipment. Normally, the

menus for the full equipment version areshown in this manual.

Menu Overview Having selected a main function, you will findthe submenu line at the bottom edge of theCOMAND display.If one of the main functions such asNavigation, Audio, Video or Phone is currentlyselected, additional menus are available fromthe main function line (Y page 19).This is indicated by a small triangle behind themain function label.

1 Triangle indicating an additional menu

Navi Audio Phone Video

Mode FM/AM Radio Phone DVD Video

Map Orientation SatRadio Address book Video Aux

POI Symbols OnMap

Disc (CD audio,DVD audio, MP3mode)

Traffic InformationOn Map

Memory card (MP3mode)

Text InformationOn Map

Music Register

Ç TopographicMap

Media Interface

COMAND Control System 19

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 22: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Navi Audio Phone Video

Ç Highwayinformation

Rear

Ç Read TrafficMessagesAutomatically

AUX

Ç Audio Fadeout

Block Area

SIRIUS Service

You can determine basic settings for the mapdisplay, route calculation and route guidancefunctions in Navigation.

i You can call up functions such asdestination entry and the destinationmemory at the bottom of the COMANDdisplay in the Navigation Submenu line.

In the Audio main function, you can switchmodes in the audio menu.In the Phone main function, you can choosebetween the telephone mode and the addressbook.In the Video main function, you can choosebetween the DVD mode and the Video Auxmode.

COMAND Control Unit The COMAND control unit allows you to:Rswitch COMAND on/offRadjust the volumeRselect the main function/mode directlyRenter telephone numbers and accept,

reject, initiate and end callsRload and eject CDs/DVDs or a PCMCIA

memory card

20 COMAND Control SystemAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 23: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Function Page

1 $

Switch to radio mode 123Switch wavebands

2 h

Switch toLast selected medium inDVD changer

139,158

Memory Card 139Music Register 144Media Interface 147

3 V

Load/eject button 134,136

4 Disc slotCD/DVD loading 134CD/DVD ejection 136Update the map software 48

5 E

Select stations using thestation search function 125Fast reverse 142Select the previous track 141

Function Page

6 q

Switch COMAND on/off 34Adjust the volume 34

7 F

Select stations using thestation search function 125Fast forward 142Select the next track 141

8 2

Clear button for functionsTelephone number entry 109Delete a digit or entire entry

9 Number keypadSelect stations via stationpresets 125Store stations manually 125Telephone number entry 109DTMF tone transmission 111

a PCMCIA memory card slot 136

b Eject button for thePCMCIA memory card 137

COMAND Control System 21

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 24: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Function Page

c 6

Accept a call 109Dial a call 109Redial 110

d ~

Reject a call 109End an active call 111Reject a waiting call 111

e W

Open the system menu 40

Function Page

f 8

Switch the sound on/off 34Mute navigationannouncements 34

g %

Switch to telephone mode 102

h Ø

Switch to navigation mode 53

22 COMAND Control SystemAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 25: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

COMAND Controller

1 COMAND controllerYou can use the COMAND controller to selectthe menu items in the COMAND display.Move a selection bar to do so.You can call up menus and lists in this way,move within menus or lists and exit menusand lists in this way.

COMAND controller operation

You can operate the COMAND controller inthe following ways:Rpress briefly or press and hold nRrotate clockwise or counter-clockwiseymz

Rslide to the left or right omporRslide up or down qmr

orRslide diagonally wmx

In the instructions, operating directions aredescribed as follows:

X Select Station list.which is a short form forX Turn ymz or slide qmr the COMAND

controller.This moves the selection bar to theStation list menu item.

X Press the n COMAND controller.This confirms your selection. The stationlist appears.

COMAND Control System 23

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 26: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Symbol

COMAND controller operation Function (example)

n Press briefly RSelect menu item or list entryRShow/hide the menu system (e.g. when

using navigation or video functions)

Press and hold until the selectedaction has been carried out

RAccept destination for navigation

ymz Rotate RMove through vertical or horizontal menusor listsRMove through textRProgram settings

qmr Slide RMove through vertical menusRExit horizontal menus

Slide and hold RMove through a navigation map

omp Slide RMove through horizontal menusRExit vertical menusRSwitch to the next/previous track

Slide and hold RFast-forward or reverse for CD Audio orDVD Audio playbackRMove through a navigation map

wmx Slide and hold RMove through a navigation map

Back Button

1 Back button k

X To exit the menu: Briefly press the kbutton 1.COMAND changes to the next higher menulevel in the current operating mode.

i You can also exit a menu by sliding theCOMAND controller omp or qmr(Y page 30).

X To switch to the main display from submenu displays: Press and hold thek button 1.COMAND changes to the main display ofthe current operating mode.

24 COMAND Control SystemAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 27: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Clear Button

1 Clear button 2

X To delete an individual character: Brieflypress the 2 button 1.

X To delete an entire entry: Press and holdthe 2 button 1.

Multifunction Steering Wheel

E-Class illustrated

Function

1 Multifunction display

2 W Volume upX Volume down8 Mute~ End and reject calls6 Accept and iniate calls

3 ? Activate Voice Control

4 % Press briefly:Navigate one level up in themenu structure of themultifunction displaycancel Voice Controlconfirm messagesPress and hold:Multifunction display changesto the standard display (tripodometer and odometer)COMAND changes to the maindisplay of the current operatingmode

5 Select submenu or scroll through lists9 Upwards: DownwardsSelecting a menu; Right= Lefta Confirm selection

Operating the Multifunction Display

G Warning!A driver’s attention to the road and trafficconditions must always be his/her primaryfocus when driving.For your safety and the safety of others,selecting features through the multifunctionsteering wheel should only be done by the

Multifunction Steering Wheel 25

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 28: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

driver when traffic and road conditions permitit to be done safely.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

X To select a menu: Press the =or ; button.

X To select a submenu or scroll in a list: Press the 9 or : button.

X To select the next menu level up: Pressthe % button.

X To select the standard display: Press the% button repeatedly until the standarddisplay with the odometer and tripodometer appears again in the display.

orX Press and hold the % button until the

standard display with the odometer and tripodometer appears.

X To confirm the selection: Press thea button.

X To confirm a display message: Press thea or % button.

Multifunction Display The description field on the multifunctiondisplay shows you values and settings as wellas any display messages that may have beengenerated.

1 Description field2 Line for menusText field 1 shows settings, functions,submenus and any malfunctions that occur.

X To show the line for menus 2: Press the= or ; button.

Menus and Submenus The number of menus shown depends on theoptional equipment in the vehicle.

Multifunction Display Menusi The following table only lists the functions

and submenus that are needed inconnection with COMAND. For informationon the vehicle-related submenus pleaserefer to the vehicle operator's manual.

Menus Functions and Submenus

Navi Navigation messages

Audio Selecting radio stationsOperating the DVD changer/Music register/Memory card

Tel Accepting a callInitiating a callRejecting a callEnding a callSelecting a phone book entryCalls dialed

Navi Menu The multifunction display shows navigationinstructions in the Navi menu.

Route Guidance Inactive

1 Direction of travel2 Current road

26 Multifunction Steering WheelAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 29: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

The road you are currently driving on onlyappears if it is in the map software.

Route Guidance Active

No Maneuver Announced

1 Distance to destination2 Distance to next maneuver3 Current road4 Symbol for “follow the road's course”

Maneuver Announced Without Change of Lane

1 Road into which the maneuver leads2 Distance to maneuver and graphic

distance display3 Symbol for maneuverWhen a maneuver is announced, you will seethe symbol for the maneuver and beside it agraphic distance display 2. This decreasesas you approach the announced maneuver.

Maneuver Announced With Change of LaneLane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

1 Road into which the maneuver leads2 Distance to maneuver and graphic

distance display3 Lane recommendation4 Symbol for maneuverOn multiple-lane roads, a lanerecommendation 3 may be shown for thenext maneuver. There may be additional lanesduring a maneuver.

LaneRecommendationDisplay

Meaning

Lane without lowerlimit

Uninterrupted lane

Lane with lower limit New lane during amaneuver

Lane with arrow Lane recommendedfor the maneuver

Navigation Status Indicators in the Multifunction DisplayWhen route guidance is activated, thefollowing messages may appear:R<: you have reached the destination.RWithin Destination Area: you are

approaching the destination. This messageappears, for example, with relatively largespecial destinations.RNew Route...: the system is calculating a

new route, for example because you havedeviated from the previous route. Routeguidance is subsequently resumed.RCalculating Route: a route is being

calculated, after which route guidance willstart.

Multifunction Steering Wheel 27

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 30: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

ROff Map: the vehicle is outside the rangeof the digital map. The vehicle is in an off-map position.ROff Mapped Road: the vehicle is on a road

which is not in the digital map, or is awayfrom the road, for example in a car park.RNo Route: no route to the selected

destination could be calculated.

Audio Menu Use the functions in the Audio menu tooperate the audio equipment. If no audioequipment is switched on, the multifunctiondisplay shows the message Audio Off.X To adjust the volume: Press the W orX button.

Selecting a Radio Station/Channel X Switch on COMAND and select FM/ AM Radio (Y page 123) or SatRadio(Y page 127).

X Select the Audio menu.

1 Wave band2 Preset number with channel number,

channel name or frequency

X To select the next or previous preset channel: Briefly press 9 or :.

orX To select the next or previous channel:

Press and hold 9 or :.

i You can only change the wave band andsave new stations/channels usingCOMAND.

Operating the DVD Changer/Music Register/ Memory Card/Media Interface X Switch on COMAND and select Disc,Memory Card (Y page 139), Music Register (Y page 144) or Media Interface(Y page 149).

X Select the Audio menu.

Example: View of the CD player1 Current disc2 Current track

X To select the next or previous track: Briefly press 9 or :.

orX To scroll through the track list in

upward or downward direction: Pressand hold 9 or :.

i If you are playing a CD or DVD with trackinformation, the multifunction displayshows the name and number of the track.The track is displayed on MP3s.

Operating the DVD VideoX Switch on COMAND and select DVD Video

(Y page 158).X Select the Audio menu.

1 Current scene

28 Multifunction Steering WheelAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 31: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To select the next or previous scene: Briefly press 9 or :.

X To search for the next or previous scene: Press and hold 9 or :.

Tel Menu

G WarningSome jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a cellular telephone while driving.Whether or not prohibited by law, for safetyreasons, the driver should not use the cellulartelephone while the vehicle is in motion. Stopthe vehicle in a safe location before placing oranswering a call.If you nonetheless choose to use the mobilephone while driving, please use the handsfreefeature and be sure to pay attention to thetraffic situation at all times. Use the mobilephone only when road, weather and trafficconditions permit. Otherwise, you may not beable to observe traffic conditions and couldendanger yourself and others.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

You can use the functions in the Tel menu tooperate your mobile phone.X Switch on COMAND (Y page 34).X Select the Tel menu (Y page 102).

Mobile Phone StatusRIf the mobile phone has not yet been

authorized, the message in themultifunction display is:Ready for Bluetooth Telephony...(Y page 99).RIf the mobile phone is switched on and

authorized, the message Phone READYappears in the multifunction display.

Accepting a Call If someone calls you while you are in theTel menu, the following message appears inthe multifunction display:

X Press 6 to answer a call.You can also take a call if you have notselected the Tel menu.

i The name of the caller only appears if it isincluded in the phone book.

Rejecting or Ending a Call X Press ~.You can also reject or end a call if you havenot selected the Tel menu.

Dialing a Number from the Phone Book If your mobile phone is able to receive calls,you can search for and dial a number from thephone book in COMAND at any time.

i You can enter new numbers in the phonebook using COMAND .

X Select the Tel menu.The multifunction display showsPhone READY.

X Press :, 9 or a to call up thephone book.

X Press : or 9 to select the name youare searching for.The stored names are displayed inalphabetical order.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: Press 6 or a to startdialing.The message Connecting Call... andthe selected number appear in the

Multifunction Steering Wheel 29

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 32: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

multifunction display. The name alsoappears, provided it is stored in the phonebook. The selected number is stored in theCALLS DIALED list in COMAND(Y page 106).If a call is connected, the phone book entryappears in the multifunction display.

orX If there is more than one number for a

particular name: Press 6 or a todisplay the numbers.

X Press : or 9 to select the numberyou want to dial.

X Press 6 or a to start dialing.The message Connecting Call... andthe selected number appear in themultifunction display. The name alsoappears, provided it is stored in the phonebook. The selected number is stored in theCALLS DIALED list in COMAND.If a call is connected, the phone book entryappears in the multifunction display.

i To exit the phone book without making acall, press the ~ button. Phone READYappears in the multifunction display.

i If you press and hold the : or 9button for more than one second, a rapidscroll begins. After four seconds, the rapidscroll speeds up. The rapid scroll stopswhen you release the button or reach theend of the list.

Redialing COMAND saves the most recently dialednames and numbers from the mobile phone.This means that you do not have to searchthrough the entire phone book.X Select the Tel menu.

The multifunction display showsPhone READY.

X Press 6 to go to the most recentlydialed number or name in theCALLS DIALED menu.

X Press : or 9 to select the numberor name you are looking for.

X Press 6 or a to start dialing.

Operating COMAND

Opening Menu of a Main Function

Example: Audio Menu

Within the Audio Function

1 Main function line2 Audio menu3 The symbol R indicates current

operating mode.

X To switch to main function line 1: Slide qm.

X To select audio main function:Rotate ymz or slide omp.

X To confirm selection: Press nYou will see the main display for theselected audio mode.

X To switch back to the main function line 1:Slide qm and press n.The Audio menu appears.

30 Operating COMANDAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 33: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Selecting Menu Item

Example 1: Radio, Station Memory

1 Selection bar

Selecting Menu ItemX Rotate ymz or slide qmr.

The selection bar moves up and downwithin the list.

Confirming Menu ItemX Press n.

Exiting the Menu Without SelectingX Slide omp in the opposite direction to the

direction of the list.

Example 2: Navigation, Enter Destination Menu

Enter Destination menu1 Menu with upper and lower menu bar2 Selector bar

Selecting Menu ItemX Rotate ymz or slide qmr.

The selector bar moves horizontally.

Switching Menu BarX Slide qmr.

Confirming Menu ItemX Press n.

Character Entry The example shows a list of cities duringdestination entry in the navigation.

1 Predictive speller with number andcharacter line

i In the predictive speller 1 you can onlyselect the characters that are currentlyavailable. The set of characters that isavailable depends on those already enteredand the data for the digital map.

When entering characters, the list entry at thetop always displays the entry that bestmatches the characters already entered.COMAND automatically adds matchingletters to those already entered by the user.

Operating COMAND 31

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 34: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Entering Characters

Using the SpellerX To select characters: Rotate ymz or

slide omp.X Slide qmr to switch between the lines in

the speller.X To confirm character selection: Pressn.

A possible option:X To switch predictive speller language

(character set): Select !.

With Number Keypad Alternatively, you can enter characters usingthe number keypad (direct input).Example:X Press one of the number keys, e.g. 2, once

or repeatedly in succession.After you have pressed it the first time, thecharacter display appears at the loweredge of the display. The first available letteris highlighted.

You see which characters you can enter withthat key. Each time you press the key, thenext character is highlighted.For example, key 2:RPress once = ARPress twice = BRPress three times = CWait until the character display disappears.

Deleting an EntryX To delete individual characters: Selectõ at the bottom right of the speller andpress n.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller.X To delete an entire entry: Select õ

and press and hold n until the entire entryis deleted.

orX Hold the 2 button down until the entire

entry is deleted.

Canceling an Entry X Select á at the bottom left in the speller

and press n.orX Press the k button.

The address input menu appears.

Accepting the First List Entry X Press and hold n until the Enter Destination menu appears.Here you will find the accepted list entry.

orIf COMAND can match the charactersentered definitively to one town, the Enter Destination menu appears automaticallywith the selected list entry.

Switching to the List Without Predictive SpellerIf other entries for a town exist, or the nameexists more than once in the system, thend is highlighted in the speller.X Press n.It is also possible to change to the list at anytime during character input.

32 Operating COMANDAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 35: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X Slide qm repeatedly until the list appearswithout the speller.

i Without the speller entering charactersusing the number keypad is not possible.

X To re-open the speller: Press the kbutton.

orX Select d and press n.

COMAND will complete your entry if thename is unambiguous. In this case, it is notnecessary to switch to the list. The Enter Destination menu will appearautomatically.

Selecting a list entry

Town list in navigation mode: G symbol for additional options

X To select a town: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To confirm selection: Press n.A town with the G symbol exists morethan once in the selected state/provinceor it has subentries. Confirming this type oftown will result in a further selection. TheG symbol then switches to I.

Operating Example

Switching to Radio Mode and Calling up the Station ListInitial situation: You would like to switch, forexample, from the phone function to radio

mode and request the Presets list fromthere.

i In this guide, the path to a menu item isshown as an action in a special typeface.Audio£Audio£FM/AM Radio£Radio£Presets.

i Depending on the initial situation, thissequence of actions may be shorter.If radio mode was active last, it is sufficientto select Audio£Radio£Presets.

The individual steps for the above exampleare described below.

Switching to the Current Audio Modei You can also call up the current audio

mode using the buttons $ or h.

X To move to the main function line: Slide qm.

X To select the audio main function: Rotate ymz or slide omp.

X To confirm your selection: Press n.The main display of the previous audiooperating mode, e.g. CD audio, appears.The selection bar is in the display/selectionwindow.

1 Selection bar

Switching to Radio ModeX To select Audio again: Slide qm.

X To confirm selection: Press n.The Audio menu appears.

Operating COMAND 33

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 36: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To select FM/AM Radio: Rotate ymz orslide qm.

X To confirm selection: Press n.The radio main display appears.

Tuning to a Station ManuallyX Slide mr to highlight the lower menu bar.X Rotate ymz or slide omp to select FM, AM

or WB.X Tune to a station by rotating ymz or slidingomp.The red line (tuning indicator) moves rightor left and stops when a receivable stationis found.

Basic Functions of COMAND

i The COMAND components can be foundon (Y page 18). Operating examples can befound on (Y page 30).

Switching COMAND On/Off X Press the q button.

A warning message is displayed. COMANDcalls up the previously selected menu.

i If you switch off COMAND, playback ofthe current audio or video source will alsobe switched off.

Sound X To switch on/off: Press the 8 button.

The sound from the active audio or videosource is switched on or muted.

i When the sound is muted, you will see theX icon in the status bar.If you change the audio or video source orchange the volume, the sound isautomatically switched on again.

i Announcements from the navigationsystem can still be heard with the soundswitched off.

Switching Navigation Announcements On/Off X Press 8 during the announcement.

i The navigation announcements areswitched on again if you start a new routeguidance or if COMAND is switched off andon with the q button.

Setting the Volume X To set: Turn the q rotary/push button.orX Press the W or X button on the multi-

function steering wheel.The volume of the selected audio or videosource changes.

34 Basic Functions of COMANDAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 37: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Volume of Navigation Announcements You can set the volume for navigationannouncements independently of the volumefor the active audio or video source.During a navigation announcement:X Turn the q rotary/push button.orX Press the W or X button on the multi-

function steering wheel.

Audio Fadeout The Audio Fadeout function, if activated,lowers the volume of the current audio sourcewhen a navigation announcement is issued.As soon as the navigation announcement hasended, the audio source will be played at theprevious volume (Y page 60).

Setting Volume for Phone Calls You can adjust the volume for hands-freemode during a telephone call.During a telephone call:X Turn the q rotary/push button.orX Press the W or X button on the multi-

function steering wheel.

Sound Settings You can select different sound settings foreach audio and video source. The soundmenu can be opened from the submenu of thedesired operating mode.Examples:RAudio £FM/AM Radio£SoundRAudio£Disc£Sound

Setting Bass and Treble X Select Sound£Treble or Bass.

The previously selected setting is indicatedby an empty bar.

Setting treble and bass1 Last selected setting2 Current setting

X To change the setting: Rotate ymz orslide qmr until the desired treble and basslevels are set.

X To save setting: Press n.The setting is stored and the menu isexited.

X To exit the menu without changes: Pressthe k button or slide omp.

Setting Balance and Fader The balance determines whether the soundintensity is higher on the driver’s side or onthe front passenger’s side.The fader determines whether the soundintensity is higher in the front or in the rear ofthe vehicle.X Select Sound £ Bal/Fad (balance/

fader).

Basic Functions of COMAND 35

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 38: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Setting Balance and Fader (display image maydiffer depending on model)1 Current setting

X To change the setting: Slide qmr oromp until the balance and fader are set asdesired.

X To store a setting: Press the n button.The setting is stored and the menu isexited.

X To exit the menu without changes: Pressthe k button.

Surround Sound Your vehicle is equipped with the harman/kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound system.You can select between LOGIC7® off andLOGIC7® on.harman/kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound isavailable for the following operating modes:RRadio (FM only)RSatRadioRCD AudioRDVD Audio (MLP, DTS, PCM and Dolby

Digital audio formats)RMP3 (including PCMCIA memory card)RAUXRVideo DVD (PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital

audio formats)

i As some DVDs contain both stereo andmulti-channel audio formats, it may benecessary to set the audio format.

i The LOGIC7® on function of the harman/kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound systemallows playback of discrete 5.1 and stereorecordings with an optimum surroundsound experience for each passenger. Itenables optimum playback of music andfilms on CD or audio and video DVDs withhigh-resolution surround formats, such asMLP, DTS or Dolby Digital. For ideal soundperception from all seats, LOGIC7®

distributes the 5.1 surround informationover the 12-channel architecture. Thisresults in sound characteristics like thoseintended by the sound engineer when theoriginal was recorded.harman/kardon LOGIC7® converts eachtwo-channel stereo sound source intomulti-channel surround sound. LOGIC7®

reads the surround information storedduring the original recording anddistributes it over the 12 channels. Noeffects are created during the process,anything that was always on the recordingis just made audible again. In addition,harman/kardon LOGIC7® moves theperceived sound source away from theloudspeakers and thereby generates anatural 360° sound experience for everypassenger.

i If you select LOGIC7® off, playback of allrecognized formats is as it is on themedium. Due to the design of thepassenger compartment, an optimumaudio experience cannot be guaranteed forall passengers.

i Discs which support the audio formatsmentioned have the following logos:

36 Basic Functions of COMANDAt

a G

lanc

e

Page 39: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Dolby Digital

DTS

MLP

Setting Surround SoundYou can select LOGIC7® on or LOGIC7® offin surround sound mode.X Select Sound£Surround.

Surround sound setting (display image may differdepending on model)

X To select the setting: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To save the setting: Press n.The setting is stored and you exit the menu.

X To exit the menu without changes: Pressthe k button or slide omp.

i Please note the following:RFor the optimum audio experience for all

passengers when LOGIC7® is switchedon, the balance and fade should be set tothe center of the passengercompartment.RYou will achieve the best sound results

by playing high-quality audio and DVDVideo.RMP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at

least 128 kbit/s.RSurround-sound playback does not work

for mono signal sources, such as the AMwaveband in radio mode.RIf the radio reception is poor, e.g. in a

tunnel, you should switch off LOGIC7®

because it may otherwise switchautomatically between stereo and monoand therefore distort the soundtemporarily.ROn some stereo recordings, the sound

characteristics may differ fromconventional stereo playback.

Basic Functions of COMAND 37

At a

Gla

nce

Z

Page 40: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

38

Page 41: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

System Menu Overview ...................... 40Switching the Display On/Off ............ 40Time ...................................................... 41Display Settings .................................. 41Read-Out .............................................. 42Voice Control ....................................... 42Language Setting ................................ 44Rear View Camera ............................... 44Bluetooth ............................................. 44Reset .................................................... 45

39

Syst

em S

ettin

gs

Page 42: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

System Menu Overview

Vehicle Equipmenti This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

Opening System Menu X Press the W function button.orX Select System in the main function line.

The system menu appears.

1 Settings menu2 Time= Display Off

Settings Time DisplayOff

Display(Y page 41)Text reader speed(Y page 42)Voice Control(Y page 42)Language(Y page 44)Rear ViewCamera(Y page 44)O ActivateBluetooth®

(Y page 44)Reset(Y page 45)

i Use thisfunction todelete yourpersonal data,e.g. beforeselling yourvehicle.

Set Time(Y page 41)Format(Y page 41)Time Zone(Y page 41)

(Y page 40)

Switching the Display On/Off

X To switch the display off: Select System£Display Off.The display is switched off.

X To switch on the display: Press the 9button, the k button or one of the=, ;, : or 9 buttons.

orX Press the q button.

The system menu appears.

i You can also press one of the functionbuttons, e.g. the h button. This turns onthe display and switches to thecorresponding function.

40 Switching the Display On/OffSy

stem

Set

tings

Page 43: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Time

Setting the Time i The correct time must be set for the

following functions to operate correctly:RCalculation of expected time of arrivalRTime stamps for calls received and calls

dialed

X Press the W function button or selectSystem.

X Select Time £Set Time.

1 Sets the time2 Current date

X To set value: Rotate ymz or slide qmr.

X To save setting: Press n.

i If you adjust the time in 30-minuteincrements, the previously selected timezone and automatic time-zone switchingbetween daylight saving time and standardtime settings are lost (Y page 41).

i The increment for setting the minutes is30 minutes due to GPS reception.

Setting the Time Format X Select System£Time£Format.

The format list appears. The R dots showthe current settings.

i The abbreviations mean:

Time format: HH - Hour, MM - Minute foreither 24-hour clock or AM/PM format

X To change the format: Rotate ymz orslide qmr.

X To confirm the change: Press n.X To store the setting and exit the menu:

Slide omp.

Setting the Time Zone and Switching Between Daylight Saving Time and Standard Time

i The correct time zone and daylightsaving/standard time must be set for thefollowing navigation system functions tooperate correctly:RCalculation of expected time of arrivalRTime stamps for calls received and calls

dialed

X To set the time zone: Select System£Time£Time Zone.A time zone list appears. The R dotindicates the current setting.

X Select the appropriate time zone.X To switch between Daylight Saving and

standard time: Select Daylight Saving Time (Summer) or Standard Time(Winter).The R dot indicates the current setting.

X To store setting and exit menu: Slide omp.

Display Settings

Setting the Brightness i The brightness detected by the COMAND

light sensor affects the setting options forthis function.

X Select System£Settings£Display£Brightness.

Display Settings 41

Syst

em S

ettin

gs

Z

Page 44: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

1 Brightness bar

X To set the brightness: Rotate ymz orslide qmr.The brightness bar moves up or down.

X To confirm selection: Press n or slideom.

orX Press the k button.

Setting the Display Design X Select System£Settings£Display.

X Select Day mode, Night mode orAutomatic.The R dot indicates the current setting.

i In the Automatic setting, COMANDevaluates the readings from the automaticvehicle light sensor and switches betweenthe display designs automatically.

Read-Out

Setting Reading Speed X Select System£Settings£Text Reader Speed.The list of possible settings appears. TheR dot indicates the current setting.

X To select the setting: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To confirm your selection: Press n.

Voice Control

Switching the Help Screen On or Off X Select System£Settings£Voice Control.

X Select Help Window.You have switched the help window onÇ or off c.

i In addition to the audible instructions, thehelp screen displays other informationduring the individualization process and thelater voice control mode.

Individualization You can use the individualization functionoption to adapt the Voice control system toyour own voice and therefore improve voicerecognition. This will affect the ability of thesystem to recognize the voices of other users,and for this reason it can be switched off(Y page 43).The individualization function comprises twoparts and lasts around five minutes. Duringthe process you will practice a few numbersequences and voice commands.

Starting New Individualizationi It is only possible to start individualization

when the vehicle is stationary. Beforestarting, switch off all devices or functionswhich could interfere, such as the radio orthe navigation system. After starting the

42 Voice ControlSy

stem

Set

tings

Page 45: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

session, the system guides you through thetraining with spoken instructions.

X Select System£Settings£Voice Control£Start New Individualization.You see and hear a prompt asking whetheryou would like further information.

X Select Yes or No.If you select No, the first part ofindividualization begins. You hear a promptasking whether you would like to train thesystem in numbers or in voice commands.After selecting Yes, you see an informationdisplay and hear information regarding theindividualization process. The first part ofindividualization then begins automatically.or

X To close the display: Press n.You hear a prompt asking whether youwould like to train the system in numbersor in voice commands.

At the end of the first part, you will see aprompt asking whether you wish to begin thesecond part.X Select Yes or No.

If you select No, individualization will becanceled. The data from the first part isstored automatically.If you select Yes, the second part will begin.

Individualization is completed at the end ofthe second part. You will see a correspondingmessage. The data from the second part isstored automatically.

Canceling the First or Second Part of IndividualizationX Select Cancel.

A prompt appears asking whether youreally do wish to cancel.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, individualization will becanceled. The data from the current part isnot stored.If you select No, the current part beginsagain.

Deleting Existing Individualization DataX Select System£Settings£Voice Control£Delete Individualization.A prompt appears asking whether youreally wish to delete.

X Select Yes or No.The individualization data will either bedeleted or not, depending on yourselection. You will see a correspondingmessage.

Switching Individualization On and OffX Select System£Settings£Voice Control £ Individualization On.You have switched individualization on Çor off c.

Voice Control 43

Syst

em S

ettin

gs

Z

Page 46: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Language Setting

This function allows you to determine thelanguage for the menu displays and thenavigation messages. The language selectionaffects the input options in the editing andsmart speller.X Select System£Setting£Language.

The list of languages appears. The R dotindicates the current setting.

X To select a language: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.The selection moves up and down.

X To confirm the language selection: Press n.COMAND loads the selected language andsets it.

Rear View Camera

COMAND shows the camera picture on thedisplay whenRthe function is switched on in the System Settings menu andRthe vehicle is shifted into reverse gearAs soon as you shift out of reverse gear, theprevious display is shown.

i In vehicles equipped with a rear viewcamera, the Video Aux connection cannotbe used for external video sources.

Switching On/Off the Display of the Rear View Camera X Switch to System Menu

System settings menu with Rear View CameraoptionX Select Settings£Rear View Camera.X Select Activation by R gear.

Depending on the previous state thefunction is switched on Ç or offc.

Bluetooth

General Information About Bluetooth®

i Bluetooth-capable devices mustcorrespond to a particular profile to beconnected to COMAND. Every Bluetoothdevice has a Bluetooth-specific name.

Bluetooth® technology is the standard forshort-range wireless data transmission of upto approximately 30 feet. Bluetooth® can beused to exchange vCards, for example.Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of theBluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

44 BluetoothSy

stem

Set

tings

Page 47: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Switching Bluetooth On or Off X Select System£Settings£Activate Bluetooth.Bluetooth is switched on Ç or offc.

Reset

i You can fully reset COMAND to thefactory settings. This process deletes allpersonal data, among other things, (e.g.station memory, address book entries,entries in the destination memory and inthe last destinations of the navigationsystem). It is recommended that youperform a reset before the vehicle ishanded over or sold, for example.

X Select System£Settings£Reset.A prompt appears asking whether you wishto reset.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, a prompt will appear againasking whether you really wish to reset.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, a message will be shown.COMAND is reset and restarted.

Reset 45

Syst

em S

ettin

gs

Z

Page 48: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

46

Page 49: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Introduction ......................................... 48Destination Input ................................ 62POI Input .............................................. 74Route Guidance ................................... 80Traffic Messages ................................. 87Destination Memory ........................... 91Last Destinations ................................ 95

47

Navi

gatio

n

Page 50: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Introduction

Vehicle Equipmenti This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

Safety Instructions

G WarningFor safety reasons, only enter a destinationwhen the vehicle is stationary. When thevehicle is in motion, a passenger should enterthe destination. Study manual and selectroute before driving.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.COMAND calculates the route to thedestination without taking account of thefollowing:RTraffic lightsRStop and right-of-way-signsRLane mergingRParking or stopping prohibited areasROther road and traffic rules and regulationsRNarrow bridges

G WarningCOMAND may give incorrect navigationcommands if the data in the digital map doesnot correspond with the actual road/trafficsituation. Digital maps do not cover all areasnor all routes within an area. For example, ifthe traffic routing has been changed or thedirection of a one-way road has beenreversed.For this reason, you must always observeapplicable road and traffic rules and

regulations during your journey. Road andtraffic rules and regulations always havepriority over the navigation commandsgenerated by the system.

G WarningNavigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.Please always use this feature instead ofconsulting the map display for directions.Consulting the symbols or map display fordirections may cause you to divert yourattention from driving and increase your riskof an accident.

Updating the Map Software The digital data for the map software willbecome obsolete, just like conventional roadmaps. Optimum route guidance by thenavigation system is only achieved with up-to-date map software. Information on newmap software versions is available from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You can have the map software updated thereby means of a DVD or perform the updateprocess yourself.

Notes on DVD Discs ROnly touch the discs at the edges.RHandle the discs with care in order to

prevent reading errors.RAvoid scratching, leaving fingerprints and

dust on the discs.RUse a commercially available cleaning cloth

to clean discs. Always wipe in a straight linefrom the inside outwards, never in a circularmotion.RAfter use, put the discs back into the box.RProtect the discs from heat and direct

sunlight.

48 IntroductionNa

viga

tion

Page 51: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Update Sequence The sequence includes the following stages:RLoading DVD into the DVD changerRUpdate process

i The update process may take between 60and 150 minutes, depending on the size ofthe map software.If possible, perform the update when thevehicle is stationary. The DVD read speedis faster when the vehicle is stationary thanwhen the vehicle is moving and the updatetherefore takes less time. If you performthe update with the engine off and thevehicle battery is no longer powerfulenough, COMAND may shut offautomatically during the process to protectthe battery. In this case, restart the updatewith the engine running.You can interrupt the update process andcontinue it at later time. If you cancel theupdate process, the navigation system isnot ready for operation.

G WarningNever leave the engine running in an enclosedspace. The exhaust gases contain carbonmonoxide. Inhaling exhaust gases constitutesa health hazard and could lead to loss ofconsciousness or even death.

Loading DVDs into DVD Changer The DVD changer is a magazine with six built-in compartments.

1 Load button2 Disc slot

X Press the Load button 1.A menu indicates which magazinecompartments are currently loaded.

X To select an empty magazine compartment: Rotate ymz or slide omp.

X To start loading: Press n.The message Please Insert Disc <x>will be displayed.

X Insert the DVD into the slot 2 with theprinted side upwards.The DVD changer pulls in the DVD. Themessage Loading Disc <x>... will bedisplayed.

i If the magazine is full, you will first needto eject a disc.

Update ProcessThe update process starts once the DVD hasbeen loaded.COMAND checks whether the map softwareon the DVD matches the vehicle's navigationsystem and system software.

Map Software is not suitable for the Navigation System or the System SoftwareA message is displayed stating that thenavigation update DVD with the new mapdata is not suitable for the system or thesystem software.COMAND ejects the DVD.

Introduction 49

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 52: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X Remove the DVD from the slot.X Have the system software updated by an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i It will only be possible to update the mapsoftware once the system software hasbeen updated.

Map Software matches the Navigation System and the current System SoftwareCOMAND checks whether the DVD's mapdata has already been installed.

Map Data Is already installedThe version release and a correspondingmessage will be given on the display.X To confirm message: Press n.

COMAND ejects the DVD.

Map Data is not yet installedThe version release and a query as to whetherthe update should be carried out will be givenon the display.X Select Yes or No.

If No is selected, COMAND ejects the DVDautomatically and the map data is notupdated.

X Remove the DVD from the slot.If Yes is selected, the map data is updated.

Updating the Map DataWhile the update is in progress, acorresponding message and a progress barare displayed. The progress bar fills from leftto right over the course of the update. Thenavigation system is not functional until theupdate is complete.You cannot eject the DVD during the update.If you switch COMAND off during the update,this will interrupt the update and the updatewill resume at the point of interruption whenthe system is restarted.While updating, COMAND may prompt you tochange the DVD. A corresponding messageis then displayed.

X Press the Load button V.The magazine menu appears. The magazinecompartment containing the current disc ishighlighted.

X Press 9.COMAND ejects the DVD.

X Remove the DVD from the slot.X Insert the DVD requested by COMAND.

If the update has been completedsuccessfully, a corresponding message isdisplayed.

X To confirm message: Press n.COMAND ejects the DVD.

X Remove the DVD from the slot.The update is complete.

If the update has not been completedsuccessfully, a message is displayedindicating that the map update is notpossible.X To confirm message: Press n.

COMAND ejects the DVD.X Remove the DVD from the slot.An unsucessful update may be caused by oneof the following:RDVD dirty or scratched.

X Clean the DVD.Please refer to the “Notes on DVDdiscs” section (Y page 48).

X Restart the update.

ROverheating as a result of excessively hightemperatures in the passengercompartment.X Wait until the passenger compartment

has cooled down.X Restart the update.

Input Restriction There is an input restriction for vehicles incertain countries.The restriction is active for vehicle speedsabove approx. 3 mph. The restriction is

50 IntroductionNa

viga

tion

Page 53: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

deactivated as soon as the speed falls belowapprox. 2 mph.Certain entries cannot be made when therestriction is active, e.g. a city or road entry.This is indicated by the fact that certain menuitems cannot be selected.

General Information

Operational Readiness of the Navigation System after the System Software UpdateSometimes the installed map software is nolonger compatible following a systemsoftware update by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. In this case, the navigationsystem is not operational.X To update map software: Proceed as

described in the “Update Process” section(Y page 49). Use map software compatiblewith the system software.

i Please note that in this case the updatemust run through right to the end. If youcancel beforehand, the navigation systemwill still not be ready for operation.

After start-up or initial start-up, the navigationsystem must perform a position findingoperation. As a result, you may have to drivefor some time until precise route guidancetakes place.

GPS Reception The correct functioning of the navigationsystem is also dependent on the GPSreception. In certain situations, the GPSreception may be impaired, distorted or evenimpossible, e.g. in tunnels, multi-storey carparks or due to snow on the GPS antenna. Ifthere is snow on the GPS antenna, you shouldremove it. The GPS antenna is at the rear onthe vehicle's roof.

Route Guidance after Vehicle Transport After vehicle transport (e.g. by ferry, car trainor by towing) COMAND must determine thevehicle location again.Position finding takes place automaticallywhen the vehicle is driven off again, even ifCOMAND is switched off. The actual length oftime may vary from case to case.While the vehicle is determining its position,route guidance is subject to the followingrestrictions:RNavigation announcements, route

guidance displays and displayed streetnames do not match the actual location.RCOMAND does not issue any navigation

announcements.RThe message Off Mapped Road and a

direction arrow are displayed instead of theroute guidance displays. The arrowindicates the direction of the destination.

i Direction arrow accuracy is alsodependent on correct vehicle positionand/or direction.

Once the position finding operation has beencompleted, route guidance takes place againvia navigation announcements and routeguidance displays.

Interrupting Journey during Route Guidancei An interruption in the journey means

parking the vehicle and switching off thevehicle.The continuation of the journey meansswitching the vehicle on again andcontinuing to drive.

Introduction 51

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 54: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

If you interrupt the journey during routeguidance and continue it later, the followingapplies:RIf you continue the journey within 2 hours,

COMAND automatically continues routeguidance.RIf you continue the journey after 2 hours,

route guidance is canceled. You will have

to continue the canceled route guidanceagain manually (Y page 85).

Measurement Units The measurement units displayed innavigation mode are identical to those set inthe instrument cluster.

Menu Overview Navi

Setting route calculation mode

Selecting map orientation

Selecting POI symbols on map

Selecting traffic information on map

Selecting text information on map

Switching topographic map display on/off

Switching highway information on/off

Switching the automatic reading of trafficmessages on/off

Switching Audio Fadeout on/off

Setting Block Area

SIRIUS Service

52 IntroductionNa

viga

tion

Page 55: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Submenu Overview

Guide Traffic Route (withactive routeguidance)

Pos. (withactive routeguidance)Position

RPT. (withactiverouteguidance)

Dest. (withactive routeguidance)Destination

SelectingPOI indepictedmapsegment, ifavailable

DisplayingtrafficmessagesReadingaloud trafficmessages

OpeningdetourfunctionHavingalternativeroutecalculatedOpeningdestinationinformationOpening routebrowser

Save VehiclePosition orcrosshairsposition

i Thecrosshairsposition canbe savedwhen thecrosshairsaredisplayedon the map.

VehiclePosition MapDestinationPosition MapCenter Map onStopoverDisplaycompassscreen

Repeatingcurrentnavigationannouncem.

Cancel routeguidanceEnteringdestinationRusing

addressRfrom

memoryRfrom Last

destinationmemoryRfrom POIsRusing mapRas

stopoverdestination

Savedestination

Switching to Navigation Mode X Press the function button Ø.orX Select Navi in the main function menu.

This displays the map with the menusystem either displayed or hidden.

i If the message Please insert the map DVD to activate Navigation.appears instead of the map display, see(Y page 48). Map without activated route guidance and with

menu system displayed1 Status line2 Main function line

Introduction 53

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 56: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

3 Current vehicle location4 Navigation submenu

Map without activated route guidance and withmenu system hidden1 Current vehicle location2 Set map orientation3 Set map scale

Displaying/Hiding Menu System X To hide: Slide qm and when the menu itemFull screen is displayed press n.

orX Press the function button Ø.

The menu system is hidden. This displaysthe map in full screen mode.

X To display: In full screen map mode pressn.

Setting Map Scale i You can only set the map scale when the

menu system is hidden (map in full-screenmode).

X Rotate ymz until the required map scale isset.The map scale 3 is displayed as soon asyou start rotating ymz. Rotating clockwisemakes the map smaller, rotatinganticlockwise enlarges it.

1 Currently set map scale as number2 Pointer indicating the currently selected

map scale3 Scale

Saving Current Vehicle Location as Destination in the Last Destinations X To display menu system if applicable:

Press n.X To save: Select Position£Save Vehicle Position.COMAND saves the current vehiclelocation as destination in the lastdestinations memory. A window appearscontaining a corresponding message.

X To exit menu: Slide omp or press thek button.

Scrolling the Map i You can only scroll the map when the

menu system is hidden (map in full-screenmode).

X Hide menu system if applicable(Y page 54).

X Slide qmr, omp or wmx.Crosshairs will appear on the map.

54 IntroductionNa

viga

tion

Page 57: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

1 Current vehicle location2 Crosshairs3 Information on crosshairs position4 Set map scale

i The display item 3 may for example bea road if corresponding data is available inthe digital map and Current Street isactivated. Or it displays the geo-coordinateposition of the crosshairs if Geo-coordinates display is activated.

Saving crosshairs position as destination in the Last Destinations memoryX To display menu system if applicable:

Press n.X To save: Select Position£Save Crosshair Position.COMAND saves the crosshairs position asa destination in the last destinationsmemory. A window appears containing acorresponding message.

Hiding crosshairs X Press the k button.

The crosshairs disappear and the map isset to the vehicle location.

orX Set the map to the vehicle location, see

description below.

Setting Map to Vehicle, Destination or Stopover Location i If you have moved the map, you can

quickly move the map to the vehicle,destination or stopover location using thisfunction. It is only possible to set it to thedestination location when route guidanceis active.

X To display menu system if applicable:Press n.

X To set map to vehicle location: SelectPosition£Vehicle Position Map.This hides the crosshairs.

orX Press the k button if the crosshairs are

displayed.This hides the crosshairs.

X To set the destination location: SelectPosition£Destination Position Map.The crosshairs position is then set to thedestination.

X To set the stopover location: SelectPosition£Stopover Position Map.The crosshairs position is then set to thestopover.

Basic Settings You can perform the settings listed belowwith route guidance inactive or active.

Route Mode This function allows you to set the followingroute calculation modes and options for routeguidance:RShort Route

COMAND calculates a route by minimizingthe driving distance without taking intoacount traffic messages.RDynamic Route

Introduction 55

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 58: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

COMAND calculates a route by minimizingthe driving time and takes into accounttraffic messages received along the route.The navigation system thus can avoidtraffic jams by recalculating the routedynamically.

RDynamic Route Only After RequestSame as Dynamic Route with theexception that a message appears askingyou whether you want to allow thererouting or not.RFast Route

COMAND calculates a route by minimizingthe driving time without taking into acounttraffic messages.RAvoid HighwaysRAvoid Toll RoadsRAvoid TunnelsRAvoid FerriesRAvoid AutoTrains

1 Route calculation mode; Route options

Setting Route Calculation ModeX Display menu system if applicable

(Y page 54).X Select Navi £Mode.X Select Short Route, Dynamic Route,Dynamic Route Only After Request orFast Route.

X To exit menu: Slide omp.

Setting Route OptionsX Display menu system if applicable

(Y page 54).X Select Navi £Mode.X To switch route option on/off: Select

required option.Depending on the previous status, theoption will be switched on Ç or offc.You may activate several options.

i The calculated route may include ferryconnections, for example, even if theoperation Avoid Ferries has beenactivated.

i If you change the route mode settingwhen route guidance is active, COMANDcalculates a new route.

Map Display

Map Orientation

1 Currently set map orientationThe following displays are possible:R9= orientation to north (the map display

is oriented to the north, north is always atthe top)R8= Driving direction (the map display is

oriented in the direction of travel, thedirection of travel is always at the top, theorange tip of the symbol pointsnorthwards)R8= Bird's-eye view

(the map display is oriented in the directionof travel, the map projection reproducesthe curvature of the earth's surface, theorange tip of the symbol pointsnorthwards)

56 IntroductionNa

viga

tion

Page 59: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Example of map from bird's-eye view1 Current crosshairs location2 Currently set map orientation

X To set map orientation: Display menusystem if applicable (Y page 56).

X Select Navi£Map Display.A dotR indicates the current setting.

1 Options for map orientation

X Select North Up or Heading Up orBird's-eye View.

X To exit menu: Slide omp.X Hide menu systems if applicable

(Y page 54).The map orientation changes accordingly.

Setting POI SymbolsYou can select which POIs are to be displayedas symbols on the map. Points of interestsinclude, for example, gas station, hotels,cinemas and restaurants.

1 Options for POI symbols (Y page 57).

X To set: Display menu system if applicable(Y page 54).

X Select Navi£POI Symbols On Map.X Select Standard Symbols or Personal Symbols or No Symbols.

The settings have the following effect:RStandard Symbols

Displays the factory-set symbolsRPersonal Symbols

The list of POIs is displayedX To switch symbol display on/off:

Select the corresponding POI.Depending on the previous status, thecorresponding symbol displays will beswitched on Ç or offc. You mayalso activate the symbol displays forseveral POIs.

RNo SymbolsNo POI symbols are shown on the map.

i The list indicates all symbols for allcountries that are contained in the digitalmap. However, not all POIs are availbale inall countries. As a result, certain POIsymbols may not be shown on the mapeven though the symbol display is switchedon.

X To exit menu: Slide omp.X Hide menu system if applicable

(Y page 54).

Introduction 57

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 60: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Traffic Information on Map Provided you have a subscription to SIRIUSXM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service,you can have the traffic information displayedon the map. There are three differentcategories of information you can select.

RIncidentsRoad sections marked by a yellow line =with arrows: traffic slowdown possible dueto incidents (e.g. road work)RSpeed and Flow

Road sections marked by yellow or redcars :.Yellow cars: Traffic congestion, averagespeed 25 – 45 mph.Red cars: Traffic congestion, averagespeed 5 – 20 mph.RFree Flow

Road sections marked by a green line witharrows ;: free flow of traffic.

1 Speed and Flow2 Free Flow3 Incidents

Text Information on Map You can have map information displayed atthe bottom edge of the screen. By default themap information is set to Arrival Time/Distance.X To set: Display menu system if applicable

(Y page 54).X Select Navi£Text Information On Map.

A dot R indicates the current setting.X Select Arrival Time/Distance orCurrent Street or Geo-coordinates orNone.

X To exit menu: Slide omp.X Hide menu system if applicable

(Y page 54).

58 IntroductionNa

viga

tion

Page 61: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Time of Arrival/Distance to Destination

Map with display activated for time of arrival/distance1 Symbol for destination2 Distance to the destination3 Symbol for estimated time of arrival4 Estimated time of arrival

i This display can only be seen during routeguidance. In the Scroll Map function youwill see other data depending on thecrosshairs position, for example a streetname if the digital map supports this data.

Current Street

Map with road display activated1 Road name or road number, e.g. for

highways

Geo-Coordinates Display

Map with geo-coordinates display activated1 Current, rounded height above sea level2 Coordinates display of the current vehicle

location (latitude)

3 Coordinates display of the current vehiclelocation (longitude)

4 Number of visible GPS satellites.

i Adequate GPS reception must beavailable for all displays. The altitudedisplay 1 may differ from actual altitudebecause the navigation system calculatesit using the GPS signals.

i In the Scroll Map function the display1 and 4 are not displayed.

“None” Menu Option

Map with display switched off1 Currently set map orientation

i In the Scroll Map function you will seeother data depending on crosshairsposition, for example a road name if thedigital map supports this data.

Topographic Map You can have the map display enhanced withtopographic features (e.g. mountain ranges,coloration based on relief information).X To set: Display menu system if applicable

(Y page 54).X Select Navi£Topographic Map.

Depending on the previous status, thefunction will be switched offcor on Ç.

Highway Information When driving on highways, you can have thenext gas stations, service areas, etc. as wellas the distance to them displayed in the right-hand half of the screen.

Introduction 59

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 62: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To set: Display menu system if applicable(Y page 54).

X Select Navi£Highway Information.Depending on the previous status, thefunction will be switched offcor on Ç.

Example display: Function on1 Available points of interest2 Name of rest area or exit number3 Distance from the current vehicle location

Read Traffic Messages AutomaticallyYou can choose whether the traffic messagesrelevant for the route are read automaticallyor whether you have to start the readingmanually using the Traffic submenu.X To set: Display menu system if applicable

(Y page 54).X Select Navi£Read Traffic Messages Automatically.Depending on the previous status, thefunction will be switched offcor on Ç.

Audio Fadeout The Audio Fadeout function, if activated,lowers the volume of the current audio sourcewhen a navigation announcement is issued.As soon as the navigation announcement hasended, the audio source will be played withthe previous volume.

X To activate: Display menu system ifapplicable (Y page 54).

X Select Navi£Audio Fadeout.Depending on the previous status, thefunction will be switched offcor on Ç.

Block Area You can define an area within the map displaythat is not to be used by the system incalculating a route, if possible.

i The calculated route may include ablocked area if the destination is within ablocked area or if the destination can onlybe reached using roads that lead through ablocked area. Highways cannot be blocked.

X To set, change or delete: Display menusystem if applicable (Y page 54).

X Select Navi £Block Area.If no areas were previously set, the mapdisplay appears ready to select an area. Ifareas were previously set, the blocked arealist appears.

X To set the map scale: Rotate ymz.X To scroll the map: Slide qmr, omp orwmx.

X To define the center of the block area: Press n.

The blocked area appears in red.

60 IntroductionNa

viga

tion

Page 63: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To change the size of the block area: Rotate ymz.

X To confirm the area and exit map display: Press n.The area is added to the block area list.

A checked entry indicates an active blockarea.

i You can block several areas for the routecalculation and activate or de-activatethem by setting or removing the checkmark.

Displaying and Changing an Existing Block AreaX To select the area you want to display

or change: Slide qmr.X Select Options£Display/Change.

The map display appears with the blockarea marked red.

X To set the map scale: Rotate ymz.X To scroll the map: Slide qmr, omp orwmx.

X To define the center of the block area: Press n.

X To set the desired size of the block area: Rotate ymz.

X To confirm the area and exit map display: Press n.

X Hide menu system if applicable(Y page 54).

Defining a New Block AreaX Select Options£Avoid New Area

The map is displayed.X To set the map scale: Rotate ymz.X Rotate ymz until the desired size of the

new block area is set.X Slide qmr, omp or wmx to shift the new

block area to the desired region.X To confirm the area and exit map

display: Press n.X Hide menu system if applicable

(Y page 54).

Deleting a Block AreaX To select the area you want to delete:

Slide qmr.X Select Options£Delete.

You will be prompted to confirm that youwish to delete the block area.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes COMAND deletes theentry.

SIRIUS XM Traffic ServiceYou can display the SIRIUS XM Serviceinformation.X To display the SIRIUS XM service

information: Select Navi£SIRIUS Service

Introduction 61

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 64: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

: SIRIUS XM traffic information servicephone number

; Serial number of your traffic informationservice module

Subscribing to SIRIUS XM Traffic Information ServiceX Contact Traffic Information service

provider at the telephone numberdisplayed in the screen.

i It is also possible to activate the satelliteservice online. To do so please visit SIRIUSXM Satellite Radio’s website atwww.sirius.com (USA).

After the connection is made:X Follow the instructions given by the

operator.The activation process may take up to 10minutes.

i If a subscription is not included withsystem purchase, credit card information isrequired to activate your account.

Compass Function You can display a compass representation ofthe current vehicle position and direction.X Select Position£Compass

: Current vehicle direction; Current, rounded height above sea level= Current vehicle position: longitude? Number of visible GPS satellitesA Current vehicle position: latitudeB Steering angle

i In order to display the height ; thereception of at least four GPS satellites isnecessary.

X To exit the menu: Select Back.orX Press the % button.

Destination Input

Introduction to Destination Input

G Warning!For safety reasons, only enter a newdestination when the vehicle is stationary.

i It is possible to enter a destinationregardless of whether route guidance isactive or inactive.

The following destination entry options areavailable:REntering a destination via the address

(Y page 63)REntering a destination from the destination

memory (Y page 71)REntering a destination from the last

destinations (Y page 72)

62 Destination InputNa

viga

tion

Page 65: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

REntering a POI (Y page 74)REntering a destination via the map

(Y page 72)REntering a stopover destination

(Y page 73)REntering a destination via “Search & Send”

(Y page 217)

Entering a Destination via the Address

i In some countries it is not possible toenter addresses at vehicle speeds aboveapprox. 3 mph. The function becomesavailable again as soon as the speed fallsbelow approx. 2 mph.

The following options are available forentering a destination via an address:REntering state/province, city/zip code and

streetREntering state/province, city and city

centerREntering state/province, city/zip code and

street and house numberREntering state/province, city/zip code and

street and junctionREntering street, state/province, city/zip

code and house number

Route calculation can then be started(Y page 70).

Opening Enter Destination MenuX If necessary switch to navigation mode and

display menu system (Y page 54).X Select Destination£Address Entry.

The Enter Destination menu appears.

Enter Destination menu

Menu Items in Enter Destination MenuSome menu items are not available or not yetavailable, depending on the address itemsentered for the address or the data for thedigital map.Example:After the state/province has been selectedthe menu items No., Center,Intersection, Save and Start are notavailable. Or the ZIP menu item is notavailable if the digital map does not containany zip codes.

Selecting a State/Province i You can only select those states/

provinces that are stored in the digital map.

X Select State/Prov in the EnterDestination menu.A menu appears where you can choose oneof the following lists:RLast States/ProvincesRStates (U.S.A.) orRProvinces (Canada).

X To select a list: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X Press n.The selected state/province list appears.

Destination Input 63

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 66: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To selected a state/province: Rotateymz or slide qmr.

X Press n.The Enter Destination menu appears again.The selected state/province has beenentered automatically.

Entering a City i You can only enter those cities that are

stored in the digital map. Any zip code thathas already been entered is deleted whena city is entered.

X In the Enter Destination menu, selectCity.The city list is displayed with or withoutpredictive speller. The display of thepredictive speller depends on how manycities are available for the selected state/province.

City List with Predictive SpellerIf this list is given in the display, the predictivespeller 8 is activated automatically.

1 Characters entered by the user2 Characters automatically added by the

system3 List entry that best matches the

characters already entered4 Switches to the list without speller5 Press and hold deletes complete entry,

press briefly deletes last character6 Currently unavailable characters7 Currently available characters

8 Predictive Speller9 Currently selected charactera Cancels an entryb List

i In the predictive speller 8 you can onlyselect characters 7 that are currentlyavailable. The availability of the charactersdepends on the characters already enteredand the data included in the digital map.

When entering characters, the list entry 3always displays the city that best matches thecharacters already entered.COMAND automatically adds matchingletters 2 to those characters 1 alreadyentered by the user.

Entering CharactersX To select characters: Rotate ymz or slideomp.

X Slide qmr to switch between the lines inthe speller.

X To confirm character selection: Press n.

Alternatively, you can enter characters usingthe number keypad (direct input).Example:X Press one of the number keys, e.g. 2, once

or repeatedly in succession.After you have pressed it the first time, thecharacter display appears at the loweredge of the display. The first letter availableis highlighted.

64 Destination InputNa

viga

tion

Page 67: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

You see which characters you can enter withthat key. Each time you press the key, thenext character is highlighted.For example, key 2:RPress once = ARPress twice = BRPress three times = CWait until the character display disappears.

Deleting an EntryX To delete individual characters: Selectõ at the bottom right of the speller andpress n.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller.X To delete an entire entry: Select õ

and press and hold n until the entire entryhas been deleted.

orX Press and hold 2 until the entire entry

has been deleted.

Canceling an EntryX Select á at the bottom left of the speller

and press n.orX Press the k button.

The Enter Destination menu appears.

Accepting First List EntryX Press and hold n until the Enter

Destination menu appears.Here you will find the accepted list entry.

orX If COMAND can match the characters

entered definitively to one city. The EnterDestination menu appears automaticallywith the selected list entry.

Switching to the City List without Predictive SpellerYou can switch to the list at any point whileentering characters.

X Slide qm repeatedly until the list appearswithout the speller.

orX Select d and press n.

City List without Predictive Speller

: G symbol for additional options

X To select a city: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To cancel selection: Select Back andpress n.

orX Press the k button.X To confirm selection: Press n.

A town with the G symbol exists morethan once in the selected state/province.Confirming this type of town will result in adisplay of further information (state/province/region) on the towns. The Gsymbol then switches to I.

If no other options exist, the Enter Destinationmenu appears again in the display.COMAND has accepted the selected city andentered it automatically in the EnterDestination menu.

Entering a Zip Code i You can only enter those zip codes that

are stored in the digital map. For somecountries it is not possible to enter any zipcode.

Destination Input 65

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 68: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X In the Enter Destination menu select ZIP.The zip code list is displayed with or withoutpredictive speller (Y page 64). The displayof the predictive speller depends on howmany zip codes are available for theselected state/province.

Zip Code List with Predictive Speller If this list is given in the display, the predictivespeller 9 is activated automatically.

1 Numbers entered by the user2 Numbers automatically added by the

system3 List entry that best matches the

characters already entered4 Switches to list without speller5 Press and hold deletes complete entry,

press briefly deletes last character6 Currently available digits7 Currently selected digit8 Currently unavailable characters9 Predictive Spellera Cancels entryb List

i In the predictive speller 9 you can onlyselect digits that are currently available.The availability of the characters dependson the characters already entered and thedata included in the digital map.

When entering a digit, the list entry 3 alwaysdisplays the zip code that best matches thecharacters already entered. COMAND

automatically adds digits 2 to those digits1 already entered by the user.For the steps ofREntering charactersRDeleting an entryRCanceling an entryRSwitching to the list without predictive

spellerproceed as described under “City List withPredictive Speller” (Y page 64).If COMAND can match the charactersentered definitively to one city, the listwithout predictive speller appears with thebest match highlighted.

Switching to the Zip Code List without Predictive SpellerYou can switch to the the list at any pointwhile entering characters.X Slide qm repeatedly until the list appears

without the speller.orX Select d and press n.

ZIP Code List without Predictive Speller

X To select a zip code: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To cancel selection: Select Back andpress n.

orX Press the k button.

X To confirm selection: Press n.

66 Destination InputNa

viga

tion

Page 69: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

If COMAND can assign the zip code to aunique address, the Enter Destination menuis displayed again. The address data has beenentered automatically. Now you can start theroute calculation (Y page 70).If COMAND is unable to assign the zip to aunique address, the Enter Destination menuis also displayed again. The zip code has beenentered automatically. To further limit thechoice, you can now enter the street. Whenentering the street, only those streets withinthe area of the entered zip code are available.

Entering a Street i Any city center that has already been

entered is deleted when a street is entered.You can only enter those streets that arestored in the digital map.

X In the Enter Destination menu selectStreet.The street list is displayed with or withoutpredictive speller. The display of thepredictive speller depends on how manystreets are available for the selected city,state or province.

Street List with Predictive Speller If this list is given in the display, the predictivespeller 2 is activated automatically.

1 List entry that best matches thecharacters already entered

2 Predictive speller

i In the predictive speller 2 you can onlyselect characters that are currently

available. The set of characters that isavailable depends on the charactersalready entered and the data included inthe digital map.

For the steps ofREntering charactersRDeleting an entryRAccepting first list entryRCanceling an entryRSwitching to the list without predictive

spellerproceed as described under “City list withpredictive speller” (Y page 64).

Street List Without Predictive Speller

X To select a street: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To cancel selection: Select Back andpress n.

orX Press the k button.X To confirm selection: Press n.The Enter Destination menu appears again.COMAND has accepted the selected streetand entered it automatically in the EnterDestination menu.Now you can start the route calculation(Y page 70).

Entering a City Center i You can only enter those city centers that

are stored in the digital map.

Destination Input 67

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 70: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X In the Enter Destination menu selectCenter.The city center list is displayed.

X To select a city center: Rotate ymz orslide qmr.

X To cancel selection: Select Back andpress n.

orX Press the k button.X To confirm selection: Press n.

After the confirmation, the EnterDestination menu appears again. COMANDhas accepted the selected city center andentered it automatically in the EnterDestination menu.Now you can start the route calculation(Y page 70).

Entering a House Number i It is not possible to enter house numbers

until a street has been entered. You canonly enter house numbers that are storedin the digital map. The digital map does notcontain all house numbers for all streets.

X In the Enter Destination menu select No..The house number list is displayed with orwithout predictive speller. The display ofthe predictive speller depends on howmany house numbers are available for theselected street.

House Number List with Predictive Speller If this list is displayed, the predictive speller3 is activated automatically.

1 Here the list entry will appear that bestmatches the characters being entered

2 List3 Predictive speller

i In the predictive speller 3 you can onlyselect digits that are currently available.The set of characters that is availabledepends on those already entered and thedata for the digital map.

For the steps ofREntering digitsRDeleting an entryRAccepting first list entryRCanceling an entryRSwitching to the list without predictive

spellerproceed as described under “City list withpredictive speller” (Y page 64).

68 Destination InputNa

viga

tion

Page 71: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

House Number List Without Predictive Speller

X To select a house number: Rotate ymzor slide qmr.

X To cancel selection: Select Back andpress n.

orX Press the k button.X To confirm selection: Press n.

After the confirmation, the EnterDestination menu appears again. COMANDhas accepted the selected house numberand entered it automatically in the EnterDestination menu.Now you can start the route calculation(Y page 70).

Entering a Junction i A junction can be entered once you have

entered a street (Y page 67). You can onlyenter those juntions that are stored in thedigital map.

X In the Enter Destination menu selectIntersection.The junction list is displayed with or withoutpredictive speller. The display of thepredictive speller depends on how manyjunctions are available for the selectedstreet.

Junction List with Predictive Speller If this list is displayed, the predictive speller3 is activated automatically.

1 Here the list entry will appear that bestmatches the characters being entered

2 List3 Predictive speller

i In the predictive speller 3 you can onlyselect characters that are currentlyavailable. The set of characters that isavailable depends on those already enteredand the data for the digital map.

For the steps ofREntering charactersRDeleting an entryRAccepting first list entryRCanceling an entryRSwitching to the list without predictive

spellerproceed as described under “City list withpredictive speller” (Y page 64).

Destination Input 69

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 72: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Junction List Without Predictive Speller

: G symbol for additional options

X To select a junction: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To cancel selection: Select Back andpress n.

orX Press the k button.X To confirm selection: Press n.

After the confirmation, the EnterDestination menu appears again. COMANDhas accepted the selected junction andentered it automatically in the EnterDestination menu.Now you can start the route calculation(Y page 70).

Starting Route Calculation i Route calculation can only be started

once all the necessary address data hasbeen entered.

X In the Enter Destination menu selectStart.

1 Destination2 Starts route calculation and then starts

route guidanceIf route guidance is not active yet, the routecalculation is started.If route guidance is already active, you will beprompted to confirm that route guidanceshould be ended.X Select Yes or No.

If you select Yes COMAND cancels routeguidance and starts the route calculation tothe newly entered destination.If you select No COMAND resumes theactive route guidance.During the route calculation, an arrowpoints towards the destination, andunderneath the message Calculating Route..., for example, is displayed.Route guidance begins after the route hasbeen calculated (Y page 80).

i Route calculation takes some time. Thelength of time depends on, e.g. distance tothe destination. COMAND calculates theroute using the digital map data. Thecalculated route may deviate from theactual road situation, e.g. as a result of roadworks or incomplete map data. Please referto the information on the digital map(Y page 58).

70 Destination InputNa

viga

tion

Page 73: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Entering a Destination from the Destination Memory X If necessary switch to navigation mode and

display menu system (Y page 54).X Select Destination£From Memory.

The destination memory list with or withoutpredictive speller is displayed. The displayof the predictive speller depends on howmany entries exist in the destinationmemory.(Y page 72).

i There is always an entry in the destinationmemory with the name My Address. Youcan assign your home address, forexample, to this entry and select it for routeguidance (Y page 91). This entry is at thetop of the list in the destination memory.

Destination Memory List with Predictive Speller If this list is given in the display, the predictivespeller 8 is activated automatically.

1 Character entered by the user2 Characters added by the system3 List entry that best matches the

characters already entered4 Switches to list without speller5 Press and hold deletes complete entry,

press briefly deletes last character6 Currently unavailable characters7 Currently available characters8 Predictive speller9 Currently selected character

a Cancels an entryb Destination memory list

i In the predictive speller 8 you can onlyselect characters that are currentlyavailable. The set of characters that isavailable depends on those already enteredand the content of the destination memory.

When entering characters, the list entry 3always displays the destination memory entrythat best matches the characters alreadyentered. COMAND automatically addsmatching letters 2 to those characters 1already entered by the user.For the steps ofREntering charactersRDeleting an entryRAccepting first list entryRCanceling an entryRSwitching to the list without predictive

spellerproceed as described under “City list withpredictive speller” (Y page 64).

Switching to the Destination Memory List Without Predictive SpellerYou can switch to the list at any point whileentering characters.X Slide qm repeatedly until the list appears

without the speller.orX Select d and press n.If COMAND can match the charactersentered definitively to one entry, the listappears automatically without the predictivespeller.

Destination Input 71

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 74: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Destination Memory List without Predictive Speller

X To select a destination: Rotate ymz orslide qmr.

X To cancel selection: Select Back andpress n.

orX Press the k button.X To confirm selection: Press n.X To start route calculation: Select Start.

Entering Destination from the Last Destinations X If necessary switch to navigation mode and

display menu system (Y page 54).X Select Destination£From Last Destinations.

Last destinations list

X To select a destination: Rotate ymz orslide qmr.

X To confirm selection: Press n.X To start route calculation: Select Start.

i For more information on the “LastDestinations” memory go to (Y page 95).

Entering Destination via the Map i In some countries, entering destinations

via the map is not possible at vehiclespeeds above approx. 3 mph. The functionbecomes available again as soon as thespeed falls below approx. 2 mph.Using the destination entry via the map,you can also enter a destination that lieswithin the digital map but whose addressdata is not included in the digital map.

Opening the MapX If at least a city has been entered, selectMap in the Enter Destination menu(Y page 63).

orX If necessary, display the menu system in

the map display (Y page 54).X Select Destination£Using Map.

In both cases, the map together with thecrosshairs appears.

1 Current vehicle location2 Crosshairs

72 Destination InputNa

viga

tion

Page 75: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

3 Information on crosshairs position4 Set map scale

i The display 3 depends on the settingsselected in “Text information On Map”(Y page 58). It may display the current roadif corresponding data is available in thedigital map. Or it displays the geo-coordinates position of the crosshairs ifGeo-coordinates display is activated.

Moving the Map and Selecting a DestinationX To move the map: Slide qmr, omp orwmx.

X To set the map scale: Rotate ymz.Rotating clockwise makes the map smaller,rotating counterclockwise enlarges it.

X To select a destination: Press n once orrepeatedly until the Enter Destinationmenu is displayed or, if COMAND cannotdefine a destination unambiguously, a listof possible destinations.

X To select a destination: Rotate ymz orslide qmr.

X Press n.If the destination is within the digital map,COMAND tries to find the destination onthe map.If the destination can be found, the EnterDestination menu is displayed with theaddress of the destination. Otherwise you

will see the entry Destination From Map.

X To start route calculation: Select Start.

Entering Stopover Destination i When route guidance is activate, you can

enter a stopover destination. Stopoverdestinations may be predefineddestinations in the following categoriessuggested by COMAND for you to select:RATM/Cash MachineRHospitalRGas StationRParking LotRRestaurantHowever, you can also enter destinationsother than those that have beenpredefined. Select the menu item Other forthis purpose.You can influence the route guidance to themain destination in a specific way using thestopover function. Once the stopoverdestination has been reached, COMANDautomatically continues the route guidanceto the main destination.

Entering Predefined DestinationsX If necessary switch to navigation mode and

display menu system (Y page 54).X Select Destination£Stopover.

No Stopover Destination available yetX Select a category.

A Stopover Destination existsX To change: Select Change Stopover.X Select a category.X Select another stopover destination.

Destination Input 73

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 76: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Selecting a Predefined CategoryCOMAND first searches for destinationsalong the route within the selected category.COMAND then searches for destinations inthe vicinity of the vehicle's location.If COMAND is unable to find any destination,a message to that effect will be displayed.X Select OK.X If necessary, select another category.

If COMAND finds destinations, a list isdisplayed in the right-hand part of thescreen. Here you will find the stopoverdestinations in the selected category.

The list showsRNameRInformation on the location of the stopover

destination in relation to the direction oftravel and theRCurrent distance to the stopover

destination.X To choose a destination: Rotate ymz or

slide qmr.X To select a destination: Press n.

The Enter Destination menu appears anddisplays the address of the destination.

X To cancel a selection: Select Back.X To start route calculation: Select Start.

Entering Another Destination as Stopover DestinationX If necessary, switch to navigation mode

and display menu system (Y page 54).X Select Destination£Stopover.X To enter: Select OTHER.

Choose from:RAddress EntryRFrom MemoryRFrom Last DestinationRFrom POIs

X Select a menu item.

The rest of the destination entry will varydepending on the selection made:For the Address Entry option see:Entering a destination via address(Y page 63).For the From Memory option see:Entering a destination from the destinationmemory (Y page 71).For the From Last Destination option see:Entering a destination from the lastdestinations (Y page 72).For the From POIs option see:Entering a POI (Y page 74).X To start route calculation: Select Start.

Deleting Stopover Destination An existing stopover destination can bedeleted.X Switch to navigation mode if necessary.X Select Destination£Stopover£Delete Stopover.COMAND deletes the stopover destinationand recalculates the route to the maindestination.

POI Input

Entering a POI in Local Area of Destination

i It is only possible to enter a POI in thelocal area of the destination when routeguidance is active.

X In the map display with the menu systemdisplayed, select Destination£ From POIs£Near Destination.

X Continue by selecting the POI category(Y page 75).

74 POI InputNa

viga

tion

Page 77: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Entering a POI in the Vicinity of the Location X In the map display with the menu system

displayed, select Destination£From POIs£Current Position.

X Continue by selecting the POI category(Y page 75).

Entering a POI in the Vicinity of a Specific Location

i Using this option you will get a list ofalphabetically sorted POIs that belong tothe city entered.

Option 1X In the map display with the menu system

displayed, select Destination£From POIs£Other City.

X If necessary proceed as described under“Selecting a State/Province” (Y page 63).

X To enter a city: Select City.The city input menu appears.

X Proceed as described in the “Entering aCity” section (Y page 64)

X After entering the city, continue byselecting the POI category (Y page 75).

Option 2X Enter an address in the Enter Destination

menu (Y page 63).X Select POI.X Continue by selecting the POI category

(Y page 75).

Entering POIs via Name Search i This function gives you access to all POIs

that are available in the digital map.

X In the map display with the menu systemdisplayed (Y page 54), select Destination£From POIs£Search By Name.This displays a list of all POIs in the digitalmap and the predictive speller.

X Continue as described in the “POI List withPredictive Speller” section (Y page 78).

Entering a POI via Phone Number Search

i This function gives you access to all POIsin the digital map stored with a phonenumber.

X In the map display with the menu systemdisplayed (Y page 54), select Destination£From POIs £Search By Phone Number.This displays a list of all POIs in the digitalmap sorted by phone number and thepredictive speller.

X Continue as described in the “POI List withPredictive Speller” section (Y page 78).

Choosing a POI Category The categories and POIs available depend onthe area for which you wish to enter the POI.RPOI in local area of destination:

Alphabetically sorted categories and POIssorted by distance in the vicinity of thedestination location are available.RPOI in the vicinity of the location:

Alphabetically sorted categories and POIssorted by distance in the vicinity of thevehicle location are available.RPOI in a particular city:

If you have only entered the country and thecity, alphabetically sorted categories andalphabetically sorted POIs within the citylimits are available.

POI Input 75

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 78: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

If you have entered more than the countryand the city, alphabetically sortedcategories and POIs sorted by distance inthe vicinity of the address entered areavailable.RPOI via name search:

An alphabetically sorted list of all POIs isavailable.RPOIs via phone number:

A numerically sorted list is available.

Selecting a Category Depending on the number of availablecategories, the main category list is displayedeither with or without predictive speller(Y page 77).

Main Category List with Predictive SpellerIf this list is given in the display, the predictivespeller 7 is activated automatically.

1 Symbol for main category2 Characters entered by the user3 Characters automatically added by the

system4 List entry that best matches the

characters already entered5 Main category list6 Currently unavailable characters7 Predictive speller8 Currently selected character9 Currently available characters

i In the predictive speller 7, you can onlyselect characters that are currently

available. The set of characters that isavailable depends on those already enteredand the data included in the digital map.

When entering characters, the list entry 4always displays the category that bestmatches the characters already entered.COMAND automatically adds matchingletters 3 to those characters 2 alreadyentered by the user.

Entering charactersX To select characters: Rotate ymz or slideomp.

X Slide qmr to switch between the lines.X To confirm character selection:

Press n.

Deleting an EntryX To delete individual characters: Selectõ in the bottom line and press n.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller.X To delete an entire entry: Select õ in

the bottom line and press n until the entireentry is deleted.

orX Press and hold the 2 button until the

entire entry has been deleted.

Canceling an EntryX Select Back in the bottom line and pressn.

orX Press the k button.

The previous menu appears.

Accepting First List EntryX Press and hold n until the list appears

without speller.orif COMAND can match the charactersentered to one entry, the list appearsautomatically without the speller.

76 POI InputNa

viga

tion

Page 79: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Switching to the Main Category List Without Predictive SpellerYou can switch to the list at any point whileentering characters.X Slide qm repeatedly until the list appears

without the speller.orX Select d and press n.

Main Category List Without Predictive Speller

Example: Main category list for POIs1 Selected main category

X To select a main category: Slide qmr orrotate ymz.

X To cancel selection: Press the kbutton.

X To confirm selection: Press n.

1 Calls up all entries in the RESTAURANTmain category

2 Calls up all entries in the BREWPUBsubcategory

3 Predictive speller

i In the predictive speller 3 you can onlyselect characters that are currentlyavailable. The availability of the charactersdepends on the characters already enteredand the data included in the digital map.

For the steps ofREntering charactersRDeleting an entryRAccepting first list entryRCanceling an entryRSwitching to the list without predictive

spellerproceed as described under “Main categorylist with predictive speller” (Y page 76).With the POI category list displayed:X To select a subcategory: Slide qmr or

rotate ymz.X To cancel selection: Press the k

button.X To confirm selection: Press n.

After selecting a subcategory you will seethe list of POIs. This contains the availablePOIs for the subcategory that are locatedin the search area.

i If ALL is selected in the list, the POI listcontains all the POIs in all subcategories ofthe RESTAURANT main category that arelocated in the search area. The list itemOTHER at the end of the list contains all thePOIs not assigned to any subcategory in theRESTAURANT main category that arelocated in the search area.

The selected main category contains nosubcategories:Selecting it immediately opens the POI list.The POI list then contains the available POIsfor the main category that are located in thesearch area.

POI Input 77

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 80: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

POI listAs an example, the illustration below showsthe POI list for the main category ofRESTAURANT, subcategory BREWPUB, in thevicinity of the location.

1 Direction of destination2 Air-line distance to the destination3 Point of interest4 Selected category or subcategory

i Depending on the POI category selected,COMAND uses different reference pointswhen determining the distance to thedestination:RIn the vicinity of the location:

The distance to the POI from the currentvehicle location.RLocal area of destination:

The distance to the POI from thedestination entered.

Selecting a POIX Select the desired POI.

The full address of the selected POI isdisplayed.

i If the selected POI has a telephonenumber entry, you can make a call to thePOI if a mobile phone is connected toCOMAND.

1 POI with address2 Starts route calculation3 Saves POI as destination4 Shows details of the address5 Initiates a call, if available6 Cancels selection7 Displays the map

X To cancel selection: Press the kbutton.

orX Select Back

The POI list appears.X To start route calculation: Select Start.

POI list with predictive speller If you have selected Entering a POI via Name Search (Y page 75), the list of allavailable POIs in the digital map is displayed.

1 First list entry after opening the list2 POI list3 Predictive speller4 Category symbols

78 POI InputNa

viga

tion

Page 81: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

i In the predictive speller 3 you can onlyselect characters that are currentlyavailable. The set of characters that isavailable depends on those already enteredand the data included in the digital map.

For the steps ofREntering charactersRDeleting an entryRAccepting first list entryRCanceling an entryproceed as described under “Main categorylist with predictive speller” (Y page 76).

Selecting a POI To accept first list entry:X Press and hold n until the list appears

without speller.orIf COMAND can match the charactersentered definitively to one entry, the list isdisplayed without predictive speller with thematching entry highlighted.(Y page 78).You can switch to the list at any point whileentering characters.X Slide qm repeatedly until the list appears

without the speller.orX Select d and press n.X To display the full address of the POI:

Select ? and press n.

X To cancel selection: Press the kbutton.

orX Select Back.

The POI list appears.X To start route calculation: Select Start.

ZAGAT® Rating Service Entries with the Z symbol contain additionalZAGAT information. ZAGAT is a service thatevaluates restaurants, for example, indifferent categories like food, decor, service

etc., supplies the average price level (cost)and a general description.

After you have selected the entry with the Zsymbol the next display includes the Zagatratings.

1 ZAGAT Ratings2 Display detailsThe following symbols may appear:RMoon: serves after 11pmRCrossed out S: closed on SundaysRCrossed out credit card: does not accept

credit cardsX To see description: Select Details.

POI Input 79

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 82: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

ZAGAT example description

Entering a POI via the Map i If the crosshairs are visible on the map,

you can enter POIs in the vicinity of thecrosshairs. If the crosshairs are not visible,you can enter POIs in the vicinity of thecurrent vehicle location.

X In the map display with the menu systemdisplayed (Y page 54) select Guide.POIs are available:Depending on the map scale selected, POIsymbols are displayed on the map. Thescale starting at which symbols aredisplayed on the map varies from symbolto symbol.You can select which symbols COMANDshould display (Y page 57). The POI nearestto the center of the screen is selectedautomatically.No POIs available:A corresponding message is displayed.

i This message is also displayed if the menuitem No Symbols under Map Display hasbeen selected (Y page 57).

X To confirm message: Press n.

1 Information about the highlighted POI2 Highlighted POI

X To select a POI: Select Next orPrevious.

X To start route calculation: Select Start,see also (Y page 70).You will be asked whether the POI shouldbe adopted as the destination.

X Select Yes or No.Route calculation starts if Yes is selected;a new POI can be chosen if No is selected.

Route Guidance

General Notes

G WarningCOMAND calculates the route to thedestination without taking account of thefollowing, for example:RTraffic lightsRStop and right-of-way signsRLane mergingRParking or stopping prohibited areasROther road and traffic rules and regulationsRNarrow bridges

COMAND may give incorrect navigationcommands if the data in the digital map doesnot correspond with the actual road/ trafficsituation. For example, if the traffic routinghas been changed or the direction of a one-way road has been reversed.

80 Route GuidanceNa

viga

tion

Page 83: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

For this reason, you must always observeapplicable road and traffic rules andregulations during your journey. Road andtraffic rules and regulations always havepriority over the navigation commandsgenerated by the system.

COMAND guides you to the destination bymeans of driving recommendations in theform of navigation announcements or routeguidance displays.

i The route guidance displays only appearif the display has been switched tonavigation mode.

If, for some reason, you do not follow thenavigation announcements or if you leave thecalculated route, COMAND automaticallycalculates a new route to the destination.If the map data contains correspondinginformation during route guidance, COMANDtries to avoid roads with limited passability,e.g. roads that are blocked for through-trafficand are for residents only.

Driving Maneuver Driving maneuvers are given in three phases:RPreparation phaseRAnnouncement phaseRManeuver phase

Preparation Phase COMAND prepares you for the next drivingmaneuver. Based on the example displayshown below, the announcement is madeusing Prepare to turn right. The displayis not split and displays the map over theentire width.

1 Next road to be taken2 Point at which the driving maneuver takes

place (dot)3 Current vehicle location, the tip of the

triangle points in the vehicle’s direction oftravel

4 Road currently being driven down

i Depending on the basic setting selectionin “Information on map” you will see in 4RInformation on “Arrival time/distance”RRoad currently being driven downRGeo-coordinate display.If you have selected the None menu item,the display is hidden.

Announcement Phase COMAND announces the imminent drivingmaneuver. Based on the example displayshown below, the announcement is made400 ft. ahead of the driving maneuver usingPlease turn left in 400 ft. and follow the ’road name’.i The announced distance to the maneuver

depends on the class of road and its speedlimit category.

The display is now split into two sectors. Inthe left half, you see the normal map view.The right side shows an enlarged section ofthe area around the junction (Crossing Zoom)or a 3D image of the road's course with theroute indicating the next maneuver.

Route Guidance 81

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 84: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

The example illustrated below shows thejunction zoom in the right-hand half.

1 Next road to be taken or sign postinformation

2 Visual distance indicator to the drivingmaneuver

3 Distance information to the drivingmaneuver

4 Driving maneuver (exit to the left)

i The solid part of the visual distanceindicator 2 reduces from bottom to top asthe announced driving maneuver getscloser.

Maneuver Phase COMAND announces the imminent change ofdriving maneuver. The distance to the drivingmaneuver is constantly updated. In theexample display below, an announcement ismade 90 ft. ahead of the driving maneuverusing Now turn right. The display is splitinto two halves, as in the announcementphase.

1 Current vehicle location, tip of the trianglepoints in the vehicle’s direction of travel

2 Visual distance indicator to the nextdriving maneuver

3 Distance information to the drivingmaneuver

Once the driving maneuver is complete,COMAND will automatically switch back tofull-screen display.

Example Display without Driving Maneuver

1 Route2 Current vehicle location3 Road currently being driven down4 Set map orientation, for explanation and

setting see (Y page 56)5 Set map scale, for explanation and setting

see (Y page 54)

82 Route GuidanceNa

viga

tion

Page 85: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Traffic Lane Recommendations On multi-lane roads, COMAND may displaytraffic lane recommendations. For this theremust be corresponding data available on thedigital map.With respect to the next two drivingmaneuvers, COMAND displays the traffic lanerecommendations 6, 7 and 8.

1 Point of the next driving maneuver2 Point of the second driving maneuver.3 Next driving maneuver, exit on right here4 Visual distance indicator to the next

driving maneuver5 Distance information to the next driving

maneuver6 Recommended lane7 Possible lane8 Lane not recommended9 Current vehicle location, tip of the triangle

points in the vehicle’s direction of travel

Explanation of the Traffic Lane Recommendations RRecommended lane 6:

From this lane it is possible to carry out thenext two driving maneuvers withoutchanging lanes.RPossible lane 7:

From this lane it is only possible to carryout the next driving maneuver withoutchanging lanes.RLane not recommended 8:

From this lane it is not possible to carry outthe next driving maneuver withoutchanging lanes.

Depiction of the Traffic Lane RecommendationsThe color depiction of the traffic lanerecommendations differs depending onwhether the display is set to day or nightdesign.

Lane Daydesign

Nightdesign

Recommended lane6

Darkblue

Lightblue

Possible lane7

Lightblue

Darkblue

Lane notrecommended8

Grey Grey

Destination or Destination Region Reached

Once you have reached your destination, acheckered flag is displayed and routeguidance is ended automatically.

Off-road and Off-map

G WarningThe COMAND navigation system may directyou to off-road routes that your vehicle maynot be capable of traversing through withoutdamaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It isthe driver’s sole responsibility to determinethe suitability of the route. Off-road routesmay be of varying conditions and theirappropriateness for use may be affected byvarious factors such as time of day, time ofyear and immediate weather conditions thatcannot be judged or taken into considerationby the COMAND system.

Route Guidance 83

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 86: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Route Guidance to an Off-road DestinationCOMAND can also guide you to destinationsthat are within the area covered by the digitalmap, but are not themselves included on themap. Such destinations are off-roaddestinations, which you can enter, forexample, by entering the destination via themap.In this case, COMAND guides you on roadsknown to the system for as long as possibleusing navigation announcements and routeguidance displays.

1 Off-road destination2 Off-road route segment (dashed line)3 Current vehicle location, tip of the triangle

points in the vehicle’s direction of travel4 Road name, if availableWhen the vehicle is entering the area that isnot covered by the digital map, the screen issplit. On the right half of the screen an arrowappears that points to the off-roaddestination 1 and the system announces:You have reached your destination area. Please follow the arrow on the display. When the vehicle comes close tothe destination the message You have reached your destination is given.

Route Guidance from an Off-road Location to a DestinationIf the vehicle location is within the areacovered by the digital map, but the map itselfdoes not contain any information on the

location, the vehicle is in an off-road position.COMAND can guide you from such a positionto a destination.At the start of route guidance you will see themessage Off Mapped Road, an arrow andthe distance to the destination. The arrowindicates the direction of the actualdestination.The blue marking for the route on the mapstarts from the nearest road known to thesystem.As soon as the vehicle is travelling again on aroad known to the system, route guidancecontinues in the usual manner.

Route Guidance from an Off-map Location to a DestinationIf the vehicle location is outside the areacovered by the digital map, then the vehicleis in an off-map position. COMAND can guideyou from such a position to a destination.At the start of route guidance you will see themessage Off Map, an arrow and the distanceto the destination. The arrow indicates thedirection of the actual destination.The blue marking for the route on the mapstarts from the nearest road known to thesystem.As soon as the vehicle is travelling again on aroad known to the system, route guidancecontinues in the usual manner.

Off-road During Route GuidanceThe actual path of the road may deviate fromthe data in the digital map due to road work.In cases like this, the system is temporarilynot able to locate the vehicle location on thedigital map; the vehicle is thus in an off-roadposition.The display then shows the message Off Mapped Road, an arrow and the distance tothe destination. The arrow indicates thedirection of the actual destination.

84 Route GuidanceNa

viga

tion

Page 87: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

As soon as the vehicle location is found again,route guidance continues in the usualmanner.

Navigation Announcements

G WarningNavigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.Please always use this feature instead ofconsulting the map display for directions.Consulting the symbols or map display fordirections may cause you to divert yourattention from driving and increase your riskof an accident.

i During an active telephone call, thenavigation announcements aresuppressed.

If you have missed an announcement, you cancall up the current announcement at anytime.X To request current announcement: In

map view with the menu system(Y page 54) displayed, selectRPT.

X To switch off navigation announcements: During theannouncement, press the B button.You will briefly see the message: The driving instructions have been muted.

X To switch navigation announcements back on manually: In map view with themenu system (Y page 54) displayed, selectRPT.

orX Start a new route calculation (Y page 70).orX If COMAND is switched on again or the

engine is restarted.

X To set the volume of the announcements: Set the volume duringthe automatic announcement (Y page 35).

orX Call up an announcement manually by

selecting RPT in map view with the menusystem displayed.

X Adjust the volume.

Audio Fadeout The Audio Fadeout function, if activated,lowers the volume of the current audio sourcewhen a navigation announcement is issued.As soon as the navigation announcement hasended, the audio source will be played withthe previous volume (Y page 60).

Canceling Route Guidance X In the map display with the menu system

displayed (Y page 54) select Destination£Cancel Route Guidance.

Resuming Route GuidanceX Select Destination£Continue Route Guidance in map view with the menusystem displayed.COMAND calculates the route.

Detour Function i The Detour function blocks a route

segment ahead. You can set the length ofthe block. COMAND calculates a detourroute if possible.

X Select Route£Detour in map view withthe menu system displayed.

X To set the length of block: SelectLonger or Shorter repeatedly until therequired length is set.The blocked segment is highlighted in red/white on the map. Shown at the top of thedisplay is the length of the blocked

Route Guidance 85

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 88: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

segment and the route segment to whichthe block goes.

X To cancel the function: Select Back.X To start route calculation: Select Start,

see also (Y page 70).X To delete block: In map view with the

menu system displayed, select Route£Detour£Delete.

Alternative Route i You can have other routes calculated for

the original route guidance using theAlternative Route function.

X In the map display with the menu systemdisplayed (Y page 54) select Route£Alternative Route.The display is split into two halves. On theleft is the map, which displays one or morealternative routes between the start andthe destination. The current route ishighlighted in dark blue, other alternativeroutes are light blue (day mode). If thedisplay is in night mode, the representationis inverse.The right side of the display showsinformation on the active alternative route,e.g. length of the segment and theestimated time of arrival.

X To select next or previous alternative route: Select Next or Previous.The selected route is now highlighted indark blue.

X To return to the original route guidance: Select Back.

X To start route guidance with the selected alternative route guidance: Select Start.

Route Browser i The route browser provides an overview

of the route. You can move along the route

segment by segment using the routebrowser and view information and detailsabout the route segments.

X In the map display with the menu systemdisplayed, select Route£Route Browser.The route browser is in the display.The top of the display shows information onthe highlighted route segment, e.g. theroad name or number and the segmentlength of the road to be driven.The highlighted route segment is identifiedon the map by its white color and red edge.

X To display next or previous route segment: Select Next or Previous.

X To enlarge or reduce the map display: Select ; or :.

X To close route browser: Select Back.

Displaying Destination Information X In the map display with the menu system

(Y page 54) shown, select Route£Destination Information.The destination information is given in thedisplay.

Example display with main destination andstopover destination1 Distance/estimated time of arrival/

estimated journey time to the stopoverdestination

2 Stopover destination =

86 Route GuidanceNa

viga

tion

Page 89: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

3 Main destination4 Distance/estimated time of arrival/

estimated journey time to the maindestination <

i When calculating the estimated time ofarrival, COMAND uses the time set on theCOMAND as its basis. For this reason, thetime on COMAND must be set correctly(Y page 41). The calculation of theestimated time of arrival does notspecifically take into considerationwhether it is summer time or standard timeat the destination. It is not taken intoconsideration whether or not thedestination is in a different time zone. Thedistance to the destination, the estimatedtime of arrival and the estimated remainingjourney time 1, 4 are not displayed untilthe route calculation is complete.

X To close the destination information:Slide omp.

orX Press the k button.

Traffic Messages

i Optional satellite radio equipment and asubscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radioservice provider are required for thesatellite radio reception referred to here.You can find more information on SatRadioin chapter “Satellite Radio” (Y page 127).

COMAND can receive and incorporate trafficmessages via satellite radio into thenavigation system. Traffic report messagesand map symbols can then be viewed in theCOMAND display.

Real-Time Traffic Notifications in the Map

COMAND can display certain traffic events inthe map. The notifications are shown in themap scale range from 0.05 mi to 20 mi.X Rotate ymz until the required map scale is

set when the menu system is hidden (mapin full-screen mode) (Y page 54).

1 Marker symbols for the extension of theaffected route section

2 Symbol for event on the route (speed andflow)

3 Destination4 Map scale

Traffic Messages 87

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 90: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Real-Time Traffic Notification Symbols

Symbol Description Traffic Notifications in Map Display TrafficReportLists

TrafficReportMessage

Warning(red)

Appears at the beginning of theaffected road section if route guidanceis active and route goes through theevent area.

Appearswithwarningentry type

Appearswithwarningentry type

Incident(yellow)

Appears at the beginning of theaffected road section if route guidanceis active and route goes through theincident area.

Appearswithincidententry type

Appearswithincidententry type

Traffic jamon route(Speed andflow)

Appears at the beginning of trafficcongestion (average speed25 – 45 mph) if route guidance is activeand route goes through congestedarea.Yellow car symbols could appear incombination with this symbol.

Appearswith trafficjam onroute (stopand go)entry type

Appearswithtraffic jamon route(stop andgo) entrytype

Traffic jamon route(Speed andflow)

Appears at the beginning of trafficcongestion (average speed 5 – 20 mph)if route guidance is active and routegoes through congested area.Red car symbols could appear incombination with this symbol.

Appearswith Trafficjam onroute entrytype

AppearswithTrafficjam onrouteentry type

Blockedsection onroute

Appears at the beginning of a blockedarea if route guidance is active androute goes through blocked area.XX XX symbols could appear incombination with this symbol.

AppearswithBlockedsectionentry type

AppearswithBlockedsectionentry type

Yellowline witharrows

Incidents Possible obstacles for traffic flow (e.g.road work)Appears on the affected side(direction) of the road

(Notpossible)

(Notpossible)

Greenline witharrows

Free flow No obstacles for traffic flowAppears only on the free-flow side(direction) of the road

(Notpossible)

(Notpossible)

Red linewitharrows

Warningmessage

Event on the roadAppears on the affected side(direction) of the road

(Notpossible)

(Notpossible)

88 Traffic MessagesNa

viga

tion

Page 91: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Displaying Real-Time Traffic ReportsX If necessary, switch to navigation mode

and show the menu system (Y page 54).X Select Traffic.If you see a dialogue box displaying themessage No Traffic Messages,this either means:RMessages were not yet receivedRthere are no messages availableX To cancel the search: Select Cancel.X To close the message: Select OKIf there are traffic reports, you will see a list.The content of the list varies depending onwhether route guidance is active or not.

List When Route Guidance is not ActiveThe list shows all the roads, areas or regionsfor which messages are available.

i A traffic message may also concern anarea or region rather than a road, e.g.impaired visibility due to fog.

X To read a traffic report: Select a road, anarea or region.

List When Route Guidance is ActiveThe list first shows roads, areas or regions onthe route for which there are traffic reports.

X To display all messages: Select Display All Messages.You will see a list of all roads, areas orregions for which reports are available,including those that do not affect the route.

X To display a traffic message: Select aroad, area or region from the list.

X To close the list: Slide omp once orrepeatedly.

Traffic Messages 89

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 92: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Example of a Traffic Message

1 Depending on your selection: Messages on the Route or All Messages

2 Message 8 of 16 for the road affected3 Text of message4 Road, area or region for which there is a

message5 State/province designation6 Icon for message type, e.g. speed and

flow message

X To scroll within the message or to the next message: Slide qmr.

X To return to the message list: Slide omp

Traffic Symbol Information X To display traffic symbol information:

Select Traffic Symbol Information.

Example display1 Road concerned2 Icon for message type, e.g. Speed and

flow message

X To display next or previous symbol information: Select Next or Previous.The symbol is highlighted.

X To change the map display: Select Map.You can zoom and pan the map display andselect other traffic messages.

X To select the symbol: Press n.X To display details: Select Details.

Details of a traffic symbol information

X To leave the details display: Slide omp.X To leave the symbol information

display: Select Back.

Read-aloud Function The read-aloud function is only availablewhen route guidance is active. It can read outtraffic reports on the route. You can set thelanguage (Y page 44) and the read-aloudspeed (Y page 42).If the automatic reading function of trafficmessages is activated, incoming trafficmessages are read aloud automatically(Y page 60).X If necessary, switch to navigation mode

and show the menu system (Y page 54).X Select Traffic£Read out all messages on route.

COMAND reads out the messages insequence.

90 Traffic MessagesNa

viga

tion

Page 93: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

i The Messages on the Route menu itemhas no function if there are no messagesrelating to the route.

X To cancel read-out of current message: Select Cancel Read-aloud Function.

orX Press the F button.COMAND reads the current message aloudand then ends the read-aloud function.

Dynamic Rerouting

COMAND can recalculate the route by takinginto account traffic messages received alongthe route.You can set the options for dynamic reroutingin the NAVI menu (Y page 55).If you have set the option to Dynamic Route Only After Request and COMANDrecalculates a route, a message appearsasking you whether you want to allow thererouting or not.

X To accept the rerouting: Select Accept.X To continue on the original route: SelectReject.

Destination Memory

Home Address i The destination memory always contains

an entry named My address which is at the

top of the list. You may wish to assign yourhome address to this entry, for example. Ifthe My address (¤ icon) entry alreadycontains data that can be used fornavigation, you can select it for routeguidance.

Assigning Home Address for First Time or Changing Home Address X If necessary, switch to navigation mode

and display the menu system (Y page 54).X Select Destination£From Memory.

If there are more than 8 entries in thedestination memory, the destinationmemory list with predictive speller isdisplayed, otherwise the destinationmemory list is displayed without predictivespeller (Y page 71).If the list appears without the inputcharacters, the entry My address ishighlighted automatically.

Switching to the Destination Memory List Without Predictive SpellerX Slide qm repeatedly until the predictive

speller disappears.The entry My Address is highlightedautomatically unless you have entered acharacter using the predictive speller.

Destination Memory 91

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 94: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

If characters have been entered using thepredictive speller:X Rotate ymz or qm slide in the list until theMy Address entry is highlighted.

orX To assign an address for the first time:

Press and hold n until the spellerdisappears.The entry My Address is highlightedautomatically in the list.

X To exit the menu: Select Back.Subsequent operation depends on whetheryou enter the address or wish to use anaddress book entry that can be used fornavigation as My address.

Entering or Changing Your AddressX If necessary, change to the destination list

without speller.X To enter the address for the first time:

Press n and select New Entry.

X To change the existing address: SelectOptions £ New Entry.In both cases, the address input menuappears.

X Enter the address. Proceed in the same wayas you would enter a destination asdescribed in the “Entering a destination byaddress” section (Y page 63).

X Select Save after you have entered theaddress.COMAND then stores the entry. You willsee a message and then the address menuwith the selected address. Start ishighlighted automatically.

Using an Address Book Entry as Home AddressX If necessary, change to the destination list

without speller (Y page 91).

X To assign an address for the first time:Press n and select Assign to Address Book Entry.

X Select Home or Work if applicable.X To change home address: SelectOptions£ Assign to Address Book Entry.

X Select Home or Work if applicable.X In both cases you will see a list with or

without predictive speller depending on thenumber of address book entries.

X Select the desired address book entry.Proceed as described in the “Searching foran address book entry” section(Y page 113).

i Information on how to link address bookentries with navigation data can be foundin “Assigning a destination to an addressbook entry” (Y page 94).

X To confirm your selection: Press n.An address is assigned for the first time:COMAND then stores the entry. You willsee a message and then the address menuwith the selected address. Start ishighlighted automatically.The address is changed:A prompt appears, asking if you really wishto overwrite My Address.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, COMAND overwrites thedestination. You will see a message andthen the address menu with the selectedaddress. Start is highlightedautomatically.If you select No, the list will reappear.

Selecting Home Address for Route Guidance i If the My Address (¤ icon) entry already

contains data that can be used fornavigation, you can select it for route

92 Destination MemoryNa

viga

tion

Page 95: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

guidance. If not, then first assign adestination to this entry (Y page 91).

X If necessary, switch to navigation modeand display the menu system (Y page 54).

X Select Destination£From Memory.You will see a list with or without predictivespeller depending on how many entriesexist in the address book.

X Destination memory with predictive speller: Slide qm repeatedly until the listappears without the predictive speller.

orX Select d at the bottom right in the

predictive speller.X Destination memory list without input

characters: Press n

1 Start route calculation to your addressYou will see the address entry menu with theaddress data for your own address. Start ishighlighted automatically.

Starting Route CalculationX Press n.

Once the route has been calculated, routeguidance begins (Y page 70).

Storing a Destination in the Destination Memory

i This function also stores the destinationin the address book. COMAND creates anaddress book entry that contains the

complete, navigable address data. You canthen select this entry in the address bookand start route guidance to the addressfrom there.

After the Address Has Been EnteredX Select Save after you have entered the

address in the address input menu.You can now select storage options.

During Route GuidanceX If necessary, show the menu system

(Y page 54).X Select Destination£Save Destination.You can now select storage options.

Accepting from the Last Destinations X Show the menu system, if necessary.X Select Destination£From Last Destinations.The list of previous destinations appears.

X To select a destination: Rotate ymz orslide qmr.

X To confirm the destination: Press n.The address of the destination is displayed.

X Select Save.You can now select memory options.

Selecting Memory Options

Saving Destination Without NameX Select Save Without Name.

COMAND stores the destination in thedestination memory and uses the addressas the destination name.

orX Select Save as My Address.

COMAND stores the destination in thedestination memory as My Address.

Destination Memory 93

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 96: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

If the selected address book entry alreadycontains address data that can be used fornavigation (¤ icon), a prompt will appearasking whether you wish to overwrite theexisting data.

X Select Yes or No.After selecting Yes, the Saving Procedure Successful messageappears; selecting No cancels theprocedure.

Saving Destination With NameX Select Save With Name.X Select the category desired, e.g. Home.

The input menu containing data fields andinput characters appears.

1 Selected data field with cursor2 Predictive speller

X To enter data: Continue with the step“Changing Data Field” in the “Creating aNew Address Book Entry” section(Y page 112).COMAND stores the destination under thename entered.

Assigning Destination to an Address Book Entry i This function assigns the complete,

navigable address data to an existingaddress book entry. You can then selectthis entry in the address book and startroute guidance to the address from there.

X Select Assign to Address Book Entry.

X Select the desired category, e.g. Home.You will see a list with or without predictivespeller depending on how many entriesexist in the address book.

X Select the desired address book entry.Proceed as described in the “Searching foran Address Book Entry” section(Y page 113).COMAND stores the data if the addressbook entry selected does not yet containnavigable address data.If the selected address book entry alreadycontains address data that supportnavigation, you will be prompted to confirmthat you wish to overwrite the existing data.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, COMAND saves the data.

Deleting Destination Home Address Entry from the Destination Memory X If necessary, switch to navigation mode

and display the menu system (Y page 54).X Select Destination£From Memory.

You will see a list with or without predictivespeller depending on how many entriesexist in the address book.

X Select the destination you are looking for.Proceed as described in the “Entering aDestination from the Destination Memory”section (Y page 71).

X Select Options£Delete.A prompt appears asking whether you wishto delete the destination.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, COMAND deletes thedestination. You see a correspondingmessage.

i If the address data, which supportsnavigation, for the destination to be deletedhas also been assigned to an address bookentry, COMAND deletes this data there,too. If the corresponding address book

94 Destination MemoryNa

viga

tion

Page 97: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

entry does not contain any other data, e.g.phone numbers, COMAND deletes theentire address book entry.

Last Destinations

i COMAND automatically saves the lastdestinations used for the last routecalculation. If the memory is full, COMANDdeletes the oldest destination. You can alsosave a destination from the lastdestinations to the destination memory.Here it is saved permanently.

Saving a Destination Permanently in the Destination MemoryX Proceed as described in the “Accepting

from the Last Destinations” section(Y page 72).

Saving the Vehicle Position in the List of Last Destinations X If necessary, switch to navigation mode

and display the menu system (Y page 54).X Select Position£Save Vehicle Position.COMAND saves the current vehicleposition as a destination in the list of lastdestinations.

Saving the Crosshair Position in the List of Last Destinations

i A crosshair appears on the map if youhave moved the map manually. You canstore the crosshair position as adestination in the list of last destinations.

X If necessary, display the menu system:Press n.

X Select Position£Save Crosshair Position.COMAND saves the crosshair position as adestination in the list of last destinations.

Deleting One of the Last Destinations X If necessary, switch to navigation mode

and display the menu system (Y page 54).X Select Destination£From Last Destinations.The list of last destinations appears.

X Select the desired destination.X Select Options£Delete.

A query appears.X Select Yes or No.

If you select Yes, COMAND deletes thedestination. You see a correspondingmessage.

Last Destinations 95

Navi

gatio

n

Z

Page 98: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

96

Page 99: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Safety Precautions .............................. 98General Information ............................ 98Activating the Mobile Phone .............. 99Submenu Overview .......................... 102COMAND Phone Book ....................... 103Call Lists ............................................ 106Making Calls ...................................... 109Address Book .................................... 111

97

Tele

phon

e

Page 100: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Safety Precautions

G WarningSome jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a cellular telephone while driving.Whether or not prohibited by law, for safetyreasons, the driver should not use the cellulartelephone while the vehicle is in motion. Stopthe vehicle in a safe location before placing oranswering a call.If you nonetheless choose to use the mobilephone while driving, please use the handsfreefeature and be sure to pay attention to thetraffic situation at all times. Use the mobilephone only when road, weather and trafficconditions permit. Otherwise, you may not beable to observe traffic conditions and couldendanger yourself and others.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

G WarningYou and others may damage your health dueto excessive electromagnetic radiation. Byusing an external antenna, the possible healthrisks of electromagnetic fields, which areunder discussion among the scientificcommunity, should be largely prevented.

General Information

Vehicle Equipmenti This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

Making Calls via Bluetooth® Interface The telephone function via the Bluetooth®

interface is available in conjunction with aBluetooth-enabled mobile phone.With a suitable mobile phone, you can useCOMAND’s hands-free feature to downloadcontacts from your mobile phone (PhoneBook Access profile) and electronic businesscards (vCards) via the Bluetooth® interface.

Suitable Mobile PhonesFurther information on suitable mobilephones and connecting Bluetooth-enabledmobile phones to COMAND is available viathe Internet at www.mbusa-mobile.com. Orcall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (US), or CustomerRelations at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).

Interruptions to the Connection While Driving

Interruptions to the connection may occur ifRthere is inadequate network coverage in

certain regionsRyou are switching from one transmitting/

receiving station (cell) to another and thereis no voice channel available in this cellRyou are using a SIM card that is not

compatible with the available networkRwhen using a mobile phone with

“Twincard”, the mobile phone issimultaneously logged into the networkwith the second SIM card.

Operating Options If the mobile phone is connected withCOMAND via the Bluetooth® interface, youcan operate the phone using the followingdevices:

98 General InformationTe

leph

one

Page 101: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RKeypad on the COMAND control unitRMultifunction steering wheelRVoice ControlThe explanations in this section assume thatthe mobile phone is connected to COMANDvia the Bluetooth® interface. Exceptions areexplicitly described.

Functional Restrictions

Under the following circumstances, thephone may not yet be useable:RIf it is not yet logged into a network. The

phone will try independently to log into anetwork. If no network is available, you willnot be able to make “911” emergency calls.If you try to make an outgoing call, themessage No Service appears briefly.

Activating the Mobile Phone

Mobile Phone With Bluetooth® Interface

Prerequisites for the Mobile Phone For making calls using COMAND via theBluetooth® interface, you will need aBluetooth-enabled mobile phone.

i Not all mobile phones available on themarket are comparably suitable. Furtherinformation on suitable mobile phones andconnecting Bluetooth-enabled mobilephones to COMAND is available via theInternet at www.mbusa-mobile.com. Orcall the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (US), orCustomer Relations at 1-800-387-0100(Canada).

Activating Bluetooth®

Before you begin activation of your mobilephone connection via the Bluetooth®

interface please ensure it is compatible withBluetooth® handsfree profile 1.0 or higher(Y mobile phone operating guide):X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the

PIN, if applicable (Y mobile phoneoperating guide).

X Activate Bluetooth® connection on themobile phone (Y mobile phone operatingguide).

i On certain mobile phones, not only do youhave to activate the Bluetooth® functionbut the device must also be made “visible”for other devices.Each Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth®

device name. It is recommended to give thedevice a personal name, by which you canclearly recognize your mobile phone.

i If the Bluetooth® function on theCOMAND is switched off, the messageBluetooth not activated in system settings. appears.

X Activate Bluetooth® connection onCOMAND (Y page 45).

Registering a Mobile Phone (Authorizing) When you use your mobile phone inconjunction with COMAND for the first time,you must register (authorize) it.It is possible to register several mobilephones. The connection is always establishedto the mobile phone that was activated last.When you authorize a new mobile phone, it isactivated automatically. You can switchbetween the authorized mobile phones(Y page 101).

Searching for a Mobile Phone X In the phone submenu select Phone£Bluetooth Phones£Update.COMAND searches for suitableBluetooth® phones within range and entersthem in the phone list.

Activating the Mobile Phone 99

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 102: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

i The duration of the search proceduredepends on the number and type ofBluetooth® phones. The search may take afew minutes.

When first entering the device list and beforerunning an update, the black dot R indicatesthe active phone (found and authorized).After running an update:

1 The check marks Ò indicate if a phonehas been authorized (black) or not (grey)

2 Device not within range but previouslyauthorized (¿ appears in grey)

3 Device within range but not yet authorizedPhone icons indicate if a phone is found(black) or not (grey).

i If the new device you are looking for willnot appear in the list and the device listalready contains 15 devices, COMAND willask you to de-authorize (Y page 101) oneor more authorized devices. You will thenhave to start the search again.

X To start search again: Select UpdateEntering Passcode X Select the as yet unauthorized device (no

check mark yet) from the list.X Select Options£AuthorizeorX Press n.X The input menu for the passcode appears.

i The passcode is any number chosen byyou between one and sixteen digits inlength. We recommend to use at least fourdigits because this improves the quality ofthe encryption during connection. Thepasscode can differ during eachauthorization for each device. You mustenter the same number on COMAND andon the device to be authorized. Please alsorefer to the instructions in the mobilephone operating guide.

X To enter from COMAND: Select the digitsin the menu bar one after the other.

X To correct entry: Select õ.X To cancel entry: Select Back.X To confirm entry: Select ¬.If a Bluetooth® connection is establishedsuccessfully, you will be prompted to enter acode on the mobile phone (Y mobile phoneoperating guide).X Enter the same passcode on the mobile

phone as you did on COMAND.The device is authorized. You can nowmake calls via COMAND’s hands-freedevice using the authorized mobile phone.

External Authorization If COMAND cannot find your mobile phone,this may be due to special security settingson your mobile phone. In this case, you cancheck whether, conversely, your mobilephone can find COMAND.

100 Activating the Mobile PhoneTe

leph

one

Page 103: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

COMAND’s Bluetooth® device name is “MBBluetooth”.X In the phone submenu select Phone£Bluetooth Phones£Update£Options£External Authorization.

X Start the Bluetooth® search on the mobilephone (Y mobile phone operator's guide).

X Select COMAND (“MB Bluetooth”) on themobile phone.

X When prompted to do so, enter thepasscode on the mobile phone and onCOMAND.

i After you have entered the passkey onCOMAND and on the mobile phone, youhave to trigger a connection to COMANDmanually on some mobile phones.

Displaying Details on a Mobile PhoneX In the phone submenu select Phone£Bluetooth Phones.

X Select the mobile phone from the list.X Select Options£Details.

The details screen for the device isdisplayed.

X To close the details screen: Rotateymz or slide omp.

orX Press the n or the k button.

Deregistering (De-Authorizing) a Mobile Phone X In the phone submenu select Phone£Bluetooth Phones.

X Select the authorized mobile phone.X Select Options£De-Authorize.

You will be asked whether the deviceshould really be de-authorized.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, the authorization of thedevice is withdrawn.

i If the authorization of a device which hadbeen authorized in the past has beenwithdrawn, the device list no longerincludes this device.

i If you de-authorize the mobile phone onCOMAND, you should also de-authorize“MB Bluetooth” on the mobile phone.Otherwise a future authorization may fail.

Activating Another Mobile PhoneIf you have authorized several mobile phones,you can switch between the individual mobilephones.When you authorize a new mobile phone, it isactivated automatically. Only one mobilephone is active at a time.X Select Phone£Bluetooth Phones.X Select the mobile phone from the list.X Press n.

The selected mobile phone is activated ifthe selected mobile is within receptionrange and its Bluetooth® function isswitched on. Any previously activatedphone is deactivated.

Setting Transmit and Receive Volume i These settings should normally not be

changed as the factory settings arematched to most mobile phones.

i Changes may result in significantimpairments to the transmission quality.These settings may not be changed duringan active phone call.

X In the phone submenu select Phone£Bluetooth Phones.

X Select the authorized mobile phone.X Select Options£Reception Volume orTransmission Volume.

i Reception and Transmission volume onlyappear for authorized devices.

Activating the Mobile Phone 101

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 104: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To set the volume: Slide qmr.The red bar moves up or down.

X To confirm selection: Press n.

“911” Emergency Call

G WarningThe 911 emergency call system is a publicservice. Using it without due cause is acriminal offense.

The following conditions must be met for a“911” emergency call:RPhone switched onRMobile phone network availableRValid SIM card in the phone (not required

on all mobile phone networks)RMobile phone connected with COMAND via

Bluetooth®

If you are unable to make an emergency call,you will have to initiate rescue measuresyourself.The “911” emergency number is a publicservice. Any abuse is punishable by law.X Enter the digits on the COMAND control

unit (Y page 109).X Press the 6 button.

The phone establishes the connection.X Wait until the emergency call center

answers, then describe the emergency.

Submenu Overview

Phone Call lists or Mic On/Off

Bluetooth Phones Displays or deletes call lists

Download Contacts Switches hands-free microphone on/off(during a call)

Delete Contacts

Phone Main Menu

Switching to Phone ModeX Press the function button % on the

COMAND control unit.

i If you press the 6 button with thephone main menu already open, the call list“Calls Dialed” appears (Y page 106).

or

From another Main FunctionX Select Phone£Phone£Phone.

i If phone mode was active last, you onlyneed to select “Phone”.

Within the Phone FunctionX Select Phone£Phone.orX In the phone mode press the k button

repeatedly until the phone main menuappears.

102 Submenu OverviewTe

leph

one

Page 105: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Phone Menu

1 Phone service status2 Signal strength (if provided by phone)3 Call status4 Displays COMAND phone book5 Displays call list selection6 Input speller with characters for entering

phone numbers7 Device name of the connected mobile

phone

COMAND Phone Book

The COMAND phone book is an extract ofentries from the address book. All theCOMAND address book entries having atleast one phone number can be found in theCOMAND phone book.

i For many operating functions you canalso use the buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel, e.g. the =, ;,9, :, a, 6 or ~ buttons,for selecting a menu, scrolling through listsor initiating or ending a call (Y page 25).

Opening COMAND Phone Book X Open the phone main menu (Y page 102).X Select Name.

The COMAND phone book is displayed.

1 Address book entry2 Calls up options3 Predictive speller4 Closes phone book5 ¦ symbol for voice name

Address book entries may have the symbol5. An additional voice name is saved withthese entries.If an address book entry has the symbol +then this has more than one phone number.You can select these subentries(Y page 103).X To close phone book: In the predictive

speller select the symbol á.orX Press k.

Selecting an Entry

Selecting via ListX Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the desired

entry is highlighted.X To confirm selection: Press n.

Selecting SubentriesX Select a phone book entry with the + icon

and press n.The subentries appear. The + iconchanges to /.

COMAND Phone Book 103

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 106: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

1 Expanded phone book entry2 Phone book entry with subentries

X Rotate ymz or slide qmr and select thedesired sub-entry.

Displaying Details on an EntryCOMAND can also fully display anabbreviated entry.X Select entry.X Select Options£Details.

The details screen appears.X To close details screen: Slide omp

repeatedly until the entry is highlightedagain.

orX Press the k button.

Initiating Call to an Entry X Select entry (Y page 103).X Press norX Press the 6 button on the COMAND

control unit.

Creating a New Entry i When a new entry is added through the

COMAND phone book, it is saved to theaddress book.

X Select Options£New Entry in theCOMAND phone book.

X Select a number category, e.g. Home.X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Phone.

X Select Save.The input menu with data fields appears.

1 Cursor2 Data field3 Input speller4 Selected phone category

Switching Data FieldX Slide qm repeatedly until the input speller

disappears.X Then slide qmr and press n.orX Select [ or ] in the input speller.

The input menu displays the data fieldselected.

Entering Data into a FieldX Select all the characters one after the other

in the input speller 3.

i The input speller provides the characterscorresponding to the selected data field.

104 COMAND Phone BookTe

leph

one

Page 107: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To switch input speller to upper or lower case characters: Select & or(.

X To switch input speller character set:Select k.Every time this is selected it switches thecharacter set.

X To change the input speller language:Select !.

X Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the desiredlanguage is highlighted and then press n.

X To move the cursor in the data field:Select Y or Z.

Deleting an EntryX To delete individual characters: Selectõ and briefly press n.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller.The character to the left of the cursor isdeleted.

X To delete an entire entry: Select õand press n until the entire entry has beendeleted.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller and hold it until theentire entry is deleted.

Cancelling an EntryX Select á.If one of the data fields contains data, aprompt will appear asking whether you wishto store the entry.X Select Yes or No.

The entry will either be stored or not,depending on your selection.

Saving an EntryX Select d.

A corresponding message is displayed.

Deleting an Entry The deletion rules vary according to the entryselected:RPhone book entry selected:

The entry is deleted in the COMAND phonebook and the address book if the addressbook entry only contains phone numbers.REntire address book entry selected:

The entry is deleted in the COMAND phonebook and additionally also in the addressbook if the address book entry onlycontains phone numbers.RSubentry of an address book entry

selected:The subentry is deleted in the COMANDphone book and in the address book.

X To delete: Select entry (Y page 103).X Select Options£Delete.

You will be prompted to confirm that youreally want to delete the entry.

X Select Yes or No.Yes option: The entry is deleted accordingto the above rules.

Adding a Phone Number to a Phone Book Entry X Select the address book entry.X Select Options£Add Phone No..X Select a number category, e.g. Home.X Select a phone category, e.g. Mobile Phone.

X Select Save.If five numbers are saved for the entry in theselected number category, a prompt willappear asking whether you wish to overwriteone of the existing numbers.

COMAND Phone Book 105

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 108: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, a selection list will appearcontaining the five existing numbers.

X Select the number to be overwritten.The input menu with the data field forentering the new telephone numberappears.

X To enter digits: Select the required digitsin sequence from the input speller or usethe number keypad.

X To move the cursor in the data field:Select Y or Z.

X To delete individual digits: Select õand briefly press the n button.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller.The digit to the left of the cursor is deleted.

X To delete an entire entry: Select õand press n until the entire entry has beendeleted.

orX Press and hold down the 2 button next

to the COMAND controller until the entireentry is deleted.

X To save entry: Select d.

Call Lists

i COMAND supports Bluetooth® PBAP(Phone Book Access Profile).How COMAND handles call lists dependson the type of mobile phone connected:RBluetooth® phone with PBAP support:

COMAND downloads the call lists fromthe mobile phone when the phone isconnected to COMANDRBluetooth® phone without PBAP support:

COMAND creates the call lists from callsreceived (including missed calls) andmade during phone mode when a mobilephone is connected to COMAND.

The particular menu item can only beselected if calls have already been receivedor made from COMAND.The display of missed calls in the COMANDdisplay is not possible with all mobilephones.

i The menu item Call lists is not activeif no mobile phone is connected toCOMAND.

i If the mobile phone does not supportPBAP, COMAND automatically deletes thecall lists if a mobile phone other than thelast used is connected.

i The instrument cluster control systemdisplays a list of the last dialed calls.

i For many operating functions you canalso use the buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel, e.g. the =, ;,9, :, a, 6 or ~ buttons,for selecting a menu, scrolling through listsor initiating or ending a call (Y page 25).

Calling up the List X In the phone main menu select Call Lists.A menu appears.

X Select Calls Received or Calls Dialed.The appropriate list appears.

orX When the basic telephone menu is

displayed, press the 6 button onCOMAND.A list of the last dialed calls appears.

106 Call ListsTe

leph

one

Page 109: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

List of incoming calls1 List of calls received2 Date/time of the highlighted entry3 List entry options menu

X To select a list entry: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To close list: Select Back.orX Press the k button next to the

COMAND controller.

Displaying Details on a List Entry COMAND can also fully display anabbreviated list entry.X Select the list entry.X Select Options£Details.

The details screen appears.X Back to the list: Slide omp until the list is

highlighted.orX Press the k button next to the

COMAND controller.

Saving Unsaved List Entry Unsaved list entries are displayed with thephone number.Saved list entries are displayed with thename. They are saved in the COMAND phonebook.

Saving in the Address Book as a New Entry X Select the list entry.X Select Options£Save£New Entry.

i Save has no function if the selected listentry is already stored in the address book.

X Select a number category, e.g. Home.X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Phone.

Number category Display (phoneand address book)

Not classified °Home @

Work \

Phone category Display (phoneand address book)

Not classified °Mobile ¢

Car ^

Pager ï

X Select Save.An input menu with data fields will appear.The data field for the phone number iscompleted automatically.

1 Cursor2 Data field

Call Lists 107

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 110: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

3 Input speller4 Data field for phone number is completed

automatically5 Phone category6 Number category

X To switch data fields: Slide qm until theinput speller disappears.

X Then slide qmr and press n.orX Select [ or ] and press n.

The selected data field is highlighted.X To enter data into a field: Select all the

characters one after the other in the inputspeller 3.

i The input speller offers the charactersthat correspond to the selected data field.

X To switch input speller to upper or lower case characters: Select ( or&.

X To switch input speller character set:Select k.Every time this is selected it switches thecharacter set (digits, lower case letters).

X To change the input speller language:Select !.

X Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the desiredlanguage is highlighted and then press n.

X To move the cursor in the data field:Select Y or Z.

X To delete individual characters: Selectõ and briefly press n.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller.The character to the left of the cursor isdeleted.

X To delete an entire entry: Select õand press n until the entire entry has beendeleted.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller and hold it until theentry is deleted.

X To save entry: Select d.A corresponding message is displayed.

X To cancel entry: Select Back.If one of the data fields contains data, aprompt will appear asking whether you wishto save the entry.X Select Yes or No.

The entry will either be stored or not,depending on your selection.

Adding a Phone Number from the Call List to an Existing Address Book EntryX Select the list entry.X Select Options£Save£Add Phone No.

i Save has no function if the selected listentry is already stored.

X Select a number category, e.g. Home.X Select a phone category, e.g. Mobile Phone.

X Select Save.The search menu for address book entriesappears.

X Search for the desired entry.

i Please see the “Searching for an AddressBook Entry” section (Y page 113) for adetailed description on searching for anaddress book entry.

X Press n after completing the search.If there are fewer than five numbers savedfor the required entry in the selectednumber category, COMAND saves thedata.If five numbers are saved for the entry youare searching for, a prompt will appear

108 Call ListsTe

leph

one

Page 111: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

asking whether you wish to overwrite oneof the existing numbers.

X Select Yes or No.If you select Yes, a selection list with thefive existing numbers is displayed.

X Select the number to be overwritten.COMAND overwrites the selected numberwith the new data.

Deleting Call Lists This function is only available if you use aBluetooth® phone without PBAB support, thatis, if the call lists have been created byCOMAND.X Select Call Lists£Delete Call Lists from the basic telephone menu.A query appears asking if all call lists are tobe deleted.

X Select Yes or No.The call lists will either be deleted or not,depending on your selection.

i If you use a mobile phone with PBAPsupport, you have to delete the call lists onthe mobile phone. Next time you reconnectthe mobile phone, COMAND downloads theempty call lists.

Making Calls

Incoming Call

Rejecting or Accepting Calls Incoming calls are indicated by a dialoguewindow.

X To reject: Select Reject.orX Press the ~ button on the COMAND

control panel or the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

X To accept: Select Accept.orX Press the 6 button on the COMAND

control panel or the 6 button on themultifunction steering wheel.

After accepting the call, you will conduct theconversation over the hands-free system. Thecall volume can be adjusted (Y page 35).Please see the “Functions during a SingleCall” section for other functions(Y page 110).

i You can also accept a call as describedabove when COMAND is showing a displayof a different main application. The displayswitches to the telephone display after youaccept the call. After the call is finished,you see the display of the previous mainapplication again.

Initiating an Outgoing Call

Entering a Phone Number via the COMAND Control Unit X Open the phone main menu (Y page 102).X Enter all the digits on the numeric keypad

one after the other.

Making Calls 109

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 112: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To delete individual digits: Press brieflythe CLR button on the COMAND controlunit.

X To delete an entire phone number: Pressand hold the CLR button until the numberis deleted.

X To place a call: Press the 6 button onthe COMAND control panel or press the6 button on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Entering a Phone Number from the COMAND Controller X Open the phone main menu (Y page 102).X To enter digits: Select the required digits

in sequence.X To delete individual digits: Select õ

and briefly press the n button.orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller.X To delete an entire phone number:

Select õ and press n until the phonenumber has been deleted.

orX Press and hold down the 2 button next

to the COMAND controller until the entireentry is deleted.

X To connect a call: Select ° at the bottomright-hand side of the input speller.

orX Press the 6 button on the COMAND

control panel or the 6 button on themultifunction steering wheel.

Redialing X Open the phone main menu (Y page 102).X Select ° at the bottom right-hand side of

the input speller.orX Press the 6 button on the COMAND

control unit when the phone main menu isdisplayed.The dialed calls list appears. The call dialedlast will be at the top of the list.

X To select a call: Rotate ymz or slide qmrX To initiate call: Press n.

Initiating a Call to a Call List Entry or COMAND Phone Book Entry X Call up a call list and select an entry

(Y page 106).orX Open the COMAND phone book and select

an entry (Y page 103).X To initiate call: Press n.

Functions During a Single Call

Phone mode with a single call1 Other party2 Symbol for active phone connection3 Switches the hands-free microphone off

or on4 Sends DTMF tones (not possible with all

mobile phones)

110 Making CallsTe

leph

one

Page 113: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

5 Device name of the connected mobilephone

6 Terminates call

Switching Hands-Free Microphone On or Off X Open the phone main menu (Y page 102).X To switch off: Select Mic Off.

If the microphone is switched off, the >icon appears in the main area.

X To switch on: Select Mic On.The > symbol disappears.

DTMF Tone Transmission i This function is not possible with all

mobile phones.Answering machines or other devices can becontrolled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remotequery functions.X To send individual characters: During a

call select the required characters usingthe COMAND controller.

orX Press the corresponding button on the

COMAND control unit keypad.Every character selected will betransmitted immediately.

X Transmitting phone book entry as a sequence of characters: Select Name.

X Select the desired phone book entry.The entry is transmitted immediately as asequence of characters.

X To switch back to the call display: SelectBack.

Ending an Active Call X If necessary, open the phone main menu

(Y page 102).X To terminate call: Select 4.orX Press the ~ button on the COMAND

control panel or the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

Call Waiting i The call waiting function must be

supported and activated by the phoneprovider.

If you are conducting a single call and youreceive another, the second call number isentered into the received calls list and a signaltone will sound.

Address Book

G Warning!Please devote your attention first andforemost to the traffic situation you are in.Before your journey, please familiarizeyourself with the address book functions.Only use the COMAND when road and trafficconditions permit you to do so. Otherwise youcould be involved in an accident in which youor others could be injured.

General Information The entries of the address book can be usedfor making phone calls and for settingnavigation destinations.

i You should delete your personal databefore selling your vehicle, using the Resetfunction (Y page 45).

Address Book 111

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 114: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Opening the Address Book

From Another Main FunctionX Select Phone£Phone£Address Book.

i If the address book was last open in thetelephone function, you only need to selectPhone.

Within the Phone FunctionX Select Phone£Address Book.

The address book main display appears.

Address book with address book entry ¥ andnavigable data ¤

i An address book entry may contain up tofive phone numbers and both a private andbusiness address.

Submenu Overview for Address Book

Address Book Search

Downloadingcontacts (frommobile phone, frommemory card orbusiness cards)Deleting contacts

Searching for anaddress book entry

New Delete

Creating a newaddress book entry

Deleting an addressbook entry

Selecting Entry in the Address Book X Rotate ymz or slide omp when the

display/selection window is active.

Creating a New Address Book Entry i You can create address data directly in

the address book. If you save phonenumbers in the COMAND phone book,these are saved in the address book. Whenyou save a navigation destination,COMAND creates an address book entrycontaining the complete address data thatsupport navigation.

X Open the address book (Y page 112) andselect New.The input menu containing data fields andthe input speller appears.

Input menu with data fields1 Selected data field with cursor2 Input speller

Switching Data FieldX Slide qm repeatedly until the input speller

is hidden.X Then slide qmr and press n.orX Select [ or ] in the input speller.

The input menu indicates the selected datafield.

112 Address BookTe

leph

one

Page 115: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Entering Data into a FieldX Select all the characters one after the other

in the input speller 2.

i The input speller provides the characterscorresponding to the selected data field.

X To switch input speller to upper or lower case characters: Select ( or&.

X To switch input speller character set: Select k.Every time this is selected it switches thecharacter set.

X To change the input speller language: Select !.

X Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the desiredlanguage is highlighted and then press n.

X To move the cursor in the data field:Select Y or Z.

DeletingX To delete an individual character: Selectõ and briefly press n.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller.The character to the left of the cursor isdeleted.

X To delete an entire entry: Select õand press n until the entire entry has beendeleted.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller and hold it until theentire entry is deleted.

Canceling an EntryX Select á.

If one of the data fields contains new data,a prompt will appear asking whether youwish to store the entry.

X Select Yes or No.The entry will either be stored or not,depending on your selection.

Saving an EntryX Select d.

The address book displays the entry.

Searching for an Address Book Entry X Open the address book (Y page 112) and

select Search.If there are more than eight entries, thesearch menu with the predictive spellerappears.

Search menu with predictive speller1 ¥ Symbol for address book entry2 ¤ Symbol for complete address data

from the navigation3 ¦ Symbol for voice name4 å Symbol for phone book entry from the

mobile phone5 Predictive spellerEntries without symbols or with the symbols1 and 3 are just address book entries. Avoice name has additionally been saved forentries with the symbol 3. Entries with the

Address Book 113

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 116: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

symbol 2 contain complete address datafrom the navigation system, which supportnavigation and are covered by the digital mapdata. You can quickly start route guidance tothis kind of entry (Y page 116).

Switching from the Predictive Speller to the ListX Slide mq or press n and hold it until the

predictive speller is hidden.orX Select d.

Switching from the List to the Predictive SpellerX Select Back from the list.orX Press the k button next to the

COMAND controller.

Searching

Searching via Predictive SpellerX Switch from the list to the predictive speller

if necessary.X To change the language of the

predictive speller: Select !.X To switch the character set of the

predictive speller : Select k.Depending on the previous setting, you willchange to letters with special characters orto numbers with special characters.

X To enter characters: Select thecharacters for the required entry one afteranother.

X To delete individual characters: Selectõ and briefly press n.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller.Each time you enter or delete a character,the closest match will be displayed at thetop of the list.

X To delete an entire entry: Select õand press n until the entire entry has beendeleted.

orX Press the 2 button next to the

COMAND controller and hold it until theentire entry is deleted.

X To end search: Switch from the predictivespeller to the list.The top list entry is highlightedautomatically.

X Back to the address book: If necessary,switch from the list to the predictive spellerand select á in the predictive speller.

orX Press the k button next to the

COMAND controller.

Searching via the ListX If necessary, switch from the predictive

speller to the list (Y page 113).X Turn ymz or slide qmr until the desired

entry is highlighted in the list.

Deleting Entry X Search for the required entry

(Y page 113).X Select Options£Delete.orX Select Delete from the address book

(Y page 112).A deletion prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No.The entry will be deleted or retained on thebasis of the selection.

i Deleting an entry in the phone book onthe mobile phone does not delete the entryin the address book.

114 Address BookTe

leph

one

Page 117: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Displaying Details About an Address Book Entry X Switch from the predictive speller to the list

(Y page 113).orX Select an address book entry from the

address book (Y page 112).X Press n.

The detailed display appears.

Details screen for private data1 Back to the previous menu2 Selected data field3 @ symbol for private data4 Calls up options5 \ symbol for business data

Selecting Another Data FieldX Rotate ymz or slide qmr.

Displaying Abbreviated Content in FullX Select Options£Details.

The complete display appears.X To close complete display: Slide omp or

press n.orX Press the k button next to the

COMAND controller.

Closing Details ScreenX Select Back.orX Press the k button next to the

COMAND controller.

Changing Entry

Changing an Address Book EntryX Search for the address book entry

(Y page 113).X Select Options£Change Entry.orX Display details about an address book

entry.X Select Options£Change Entry.

The input menu with data fields appears.

X Continue from the step "Switching DataField" in the "Creating a New Address BookEntry" section (Y page 112).

Changing Category of a Phone Number Data FieldX Display the details for an entry and

highlight the phone number data field(Y page 115).

X Select Options£Change Category.X Select a number category, e.g. Home.X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile Phone.

Address Book 115

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 118: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X Select Preferred, where applicable.Depending on the previous state, switchthe option on Ç or off c. The phonenumber is displayed as the first number inthe phone book and can be dialedimmediately.

X Select Save.The new category is saved.

Initiating a Phone Call to an Entry i The mobile phone must be connected via

the Bluetooth® interface.

X Display the details for an entry andhighlight the phone number data field(Y page 115).

X Press n.The phone initiates the call. The displayswitches to the phone mode display.

orX Select Options£Call.

The phone initiates the call.

Starting Navigation to an Entry i You can use this function as soon as you

have saved a destination in the destinationmemory (Y page 91). COMAND then alsosaves the destination in the address bookwith the complete address data thatsupports navigation.

X Search for an address book entry with the¤ symbol (Y page 113).

X Display the details about an entry andhighlight the address data field(Y page 115).

X Press n.

i Pressing n only works if the address datafield contains complete navigable data.This is indicated by the ¤ symbol.

orX Select Options£Navigate.

i Navigate can only be selected when theaddress data field contains completenavigable data. This is indicated by the ¤symbol.

1 Address that supports navigation2 Opens Enter Destination menuThe Enter Destination menu appears, theselector bar is located at the menu itemStart (Y page 70).

Voice Names i Voice names can be entered via Voice

Control System.

Adding Voice Namei You can add one voice name per address

book entry.

X Search for an address book entry withoutor with a voice name (¦ icon)(Y page 113).

X Select Options£Voice Name£Add.The process continues by voicecommands. The Voice Control Systemguides you through the dialogs(Y page 197).

116 Address BookTe

leph

one

Page 119: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Deleting Voice NameX Search for the address book entry with a

voice entry (Y page 113).X Select Options£Voice Name£Delete.A deletion prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No.COMAND deletes the voice entrydepending on your selection.

Listening to Voice NameX Search for the address book entry with a

voice entry (Y page 113).X Select Options£Voice Name£Listen.You will hear the voice name.

Downloading Contacts You can download contacts from the mobilephone or from the memory card into theaddress book or receive vCards from anexternal Bluetooth® device.The à icon in the address book indicatesphone book entries which have beendownloaded from the mobile phone.

i Depending on the mobile phone used, thisfunction imports only the phone bookentries in the mobile phone or the phonebook entries in the SIM card.

Entries imported from the PCMCIA memorycard have the ÆÂ icons. ReceivedvCards are identified by the Æ icon andBT.Depending on the source of the contact data,different requirements apply:Mobile phone with Bluetooth® profile PBAPRBluetooth® must be activated in COMAND

and on the mobile phone (see the mobilephone operating instructions).RThe mobile phone is connected to

COMAND (Y page 99).

PCMCIA memory cardRThe PCMCIA memory card is inserted

(Y page 136) and contains importablecontact data.

External Bluetooth® deviceRBluetooth® is activated in COMAND and on

the Bluetooth® device (N operatinginstructions of the device).RThe Bluetooth® device can send vCards via

Bluetooth® (N operating instructions of thedevice).RThe Bluetooth® device in the vehicle is

switched on.It is not necessary to authorize the device inCOMAND to receive vCards.

Downloading from a Mobile Phone with PBAP SupportX Select Address Book or, if the phone main

menu is displayed, Phone on COMAND.X Select Download Contacts

A selection menu appears.

X Select From Mobile Phone.X Select Add or Overwrite.

Selecting Add imports the phone bookentries from the mobile phone into theaddress book.Selecting Overwrite downloads thetelephone entries from the mobile phoneand overwrites all phone book entries in theaddress book with the d icon. The

Address Book 117

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 120: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

previous phone book entries are then nolonger available.After successfully downloading the contactdata you see a corresponding message.The address book or the phone main menuis displayed.

i You can select the Overwrite menu itemif the address book already contains suchentries. If the address book is full, you seea corresponding message.

Downloading from the Memory CardX Select Address Book or, if the phone main

menu is displayed, Phone.X Select Download Contacts.

A selection menu appears.X Select From Memory Card.X Select Add or Overwrite.

Selecting Add imports the entries from thePCMCIA memory card into the addressbook.Selecting Overwrite imports the entriesfrom the PCMCIA memory card andoverwrites all entries in the address bookwith the ¥Â icons. The previous entriesare then no longer available.After successfully importing the contactdata you see a corresponding message.The address book or the phone main menuis displayed.

i You can select the Overwrite menu itemif the address book already contains suchentries. If the address book is full, you seea corresponding message.

Downloading vCards via Bluetooth®

You can receive vCards from devices (such asa PC) which support the transmission ofvCards via Bluetooth®.It is not necessary to authorize the device inCOMAND to do so.

Received vCards are imported into theaddress book.

i If you switch to another main function,e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, thereception of vCards will be terminated.

X Select Address Book or, if the phone mainmenu is displayed, Phone.

X Select Download Contacts.A selection menu appears.

X Select Receive Business Cards.This interrupts the Bluetooth connectionbetween COMAND and your active mobilephone. COMAND is ready to receive vCardsfrom another Bluetooth® device.

X Start data transfer on the externalBluetooth device (N operating instructionsof the device).The data on the vCards is automaticallytransferred to the address book. Thenumber of vCards received is displayed.

X To cancel the transfer: Press W.orX Press the % button.

Deleting DataX If the address book is displayed, selectAddress BookQDelete Contacts.

orX If the phone main menu is displayed, selectPhoneQDelete Contacts.A selection menu appears.

118 Address BookTe

leph

one

Page 121: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X Select Internal Contacts or From Mobile Phone or From Memory Card orReceived Business Cards or Delete All.A prompt corresponding to your selectionappears.

X Select Yes or No.X Press the W button.

If you confirm by selecting Yes, thecontacts you have selected are deleted.

Address Book 119

Tele

phon

e

Z

Page 122: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

120

Page 123: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Audio Menu ....................................... 122Radio .................................................. 123Satellite Radio ................................... 127CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3 .............. 131Music Register .................................. 144Media Interface ................................. 147Audio Aux .......................................... 153

121

Audi

o

Page 124: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Audio Menu

i Information on the COMAND controlsystem and how to operate it can be foundon (Y page 18).

i For many operating functions you canalso use the buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel, e.g. the =, ;,9, : buttons, for selecting a channelor a menu or scrolling through lists(Y page 25).

Vehicle Equipmenti This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

Calling up the Audio MenuX Select Audio

The audio mode last active is switched on.orX Press the $ function button.

Radio mode is switched onX Select Audio

The audio menu appears.

i If radio mode was active last, you onlyneed to select Audio.

Display with Audio menu1 Main function line2 Current audio mode3 Audio menuYou can switch to the various audio modes inthe audio menu:RFM / AM radio mode (Y page 123)RSatRadio mode (Y page 127)RCD-/DVD audio/MP3 mode (Y page 131)RMemory Card (Y page 139)RMusic Register (Y page 144)RRear (Y page 122)RAux mode (Y page 153)

Rear Playback Mode

Rear playback mode channels the audiosource from the Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem to COMAND for playback through thevehicle speakers.X Switching on Rear playback mode:

Select Rear from the Audio menu

122 Audio MenuAu

dio

Page 125: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Radio

Switching to the Radio

From the COMAND Control UnitX Press the $ function button.orX Select Audio£Audio£FM/AM Radio in

the display.

i Press the button repeatedly to switchwavebands in the sequence FM, AM, WBand SatRadio mode. Pressing again willswitch back to FM radio mode.

Within the Audio FunctionX Select Audio£FM/AM Radio.

The radio display appears. The last selectedstation in the last selected waveband isheard.

1 Main area with tuning dial2 Memory preset number3 Name of selected station (HD Radio

symbol und subprogram number for HDRadio stations only)

4 Station frequency5 Sound settings6 FM, AM or WB radio7 Program info8 Stored station list9 Radio functions

Notes on HD Radio™i HD Radio features includeRdigital broadcasts in the same waveband

as analog AM/FM; the analog AM/FMstations remain at their current place onthe dialRthe ability to broadcast multiple program

streams over a single FM frequency (e.g.HD1, HD2, etc.)Rstatic-free, clear receptionRFM stations offer CD quality sound, AM

stations sound like analog FM stationsRa variety of data services, including text-

based information – artist name, songtitle, etc. – shown on the display.

More information on HD Radio you will findat http://www.hdradio.com.

You can de-activate HD Radio for the selectedfrequency in the radio submenu.

X Select Radio£HD Radio in the radiodisplay.If the checkbox c is unchecked, HDRadio is de-activated.Now you hear the analog program of thisfrequency.As soon as you change to another HD Radiofrequency, HD Radio will be re-activated.

Radio 123

Audi

o

Z

Page 126: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Submenu Overview

Radio (FMand AMonly)

Presets(FM andAM only)

Channel(WB only)

Info FM Sound

EnterFrequency

Autostore List ofreceivablechannels

ProgramInformation

FM Treble

Ç ShowStationInformation

List ofstoredstations

AM Bass

ÇHDRadio

WB Balance/Fader

Ç Activeaud./vid.source forthe rear

Surroundsound

Ç Rearaudio/video off

Switching Wavebands You can switch the radio between the FM,AM, and WB wavebands.X Press the $ function button on the

control unit repeatedly until the desiredband is selected.

i Press the button $ repeatedly toswitch waveband in the sequence of FM,AM, WB and SatRadio mode. Pressing againwill switch back to FM radio mode.

orX Press : to highlight the submenu.X To select a waveband: Rotate ymz or

slide omp until the currently set wavebandis highlighted (FM, AM or WB).

X Press 9.Waveband submeu is opened.

1 Waveband submenuThe currently set waveband is indicatedby a dot #.

X Select the desired waveband (FM, AM orWB).

124 RadioAu

dio

Page 127: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Tuning to a Station You can tune to a station via station search,by manual frequency input or via the stationmemory.

Tuning to a Station via Station SearchX Rotate ymz or slide omp when the main

area is highlighted.orX Press E or F on the COMAND

control unit.The search proceeds upwards ordownwards and stops at the nextreceivable station.

Tuning to a Station via Manual Frequency InputX Select Radio£Enter Frequency in the

radio display.An input menu appears.

orX Press õ on the control unit.X To enter a frequency: Press number

buttons on the control unit.

i You can only select numbers that arecurrently permissible.

COMAND will tune to the frequency entered.

i If in the FM or AM wavebands you enter afrequency outside the frequency sub-range, COMAND will select the nextfrequency down.

Tuning to a Station via the Station MemoryX Select Presets in the radio display.orX Press n when the main area is highlighted.

The station memory appears. The dot R infront of a preset indicates that the currentlytuned station is stored there.

X To select a station: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To tune to a station: Press n.orX Press a number key, e.g. 4, on the control

unit.

Wavebands Frequency

AM (MF) 530 - 1700 kHz

FM (VHF) 87.7 - 107.9 MHz

WB (Weather Band) Weather channels

Storing Stations There are 10 presets available for FM, AM andSatRadio wavebands.

Storing Stations ManuallyX Press n when the main area is highlighted.orX Select Presets in the radio display.

In both cases, the station memory willappear. The dot R in front of a presetstation indicates the station the radio iscurrently tuned to.

Station memory

Radio 125

Audi

o

Z

Page 128: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To store a station to a selected preset:Press and hold n until a signal tonesounds.

orX Press and hold a number key, e.g. 4, until

a signal tone sounds.The station is stored.

Storing via Autostorei The function automatically assigns

receivable stations to the presets, sortedaccording to reception quality. The stationswhich were stored in the station memorymanually are overwritten.

X Press n when the main area is active.X Select Autostore.orX Select Presets£Autostore in the radio

display.COMAND searches for receivable stations.A corresponding message is displayed. Theavailable stations are automatically storedunder the presets.

Canceling Autostore ProcedureX Select Cancel.

Switching to Weather Band X Press the $ function button on the

control unit repeatedly until the weatherband is selected.

orX Slide mr to highlight the submenu.X To select the weather band: Rotateymz or slide o until the currently setwaveband is highlighted (FM or AM).

X Press 9.Waveband submeu is opened.

X Select WB.

Searching a ChannelX Rotate ymz or slide omp when the main

area is highlighted.orX Press E or F on the control unit.

The search proceeds upwards ordownwards and stops at the nextreceivable channel.

Selecting a Channel from Channel listX Slide mr to highlight the submenu.X To call up the channel list: Rotate ymz

or slide omp until Channel is highlighted.X Press n.

The channel list appears.

X To select a channel: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To tune to the selected channel: Press n.

orX Press a number key, e.g. 4, on the control

unit at any time.

Station Informationi This feature is only available for analog

FM and digital AM/FM (HD Radio)programs.

Information on the current station isdisplayed beneath the main function line.

126 RadioAu

dio

Page 129: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X To activate/deactivate the station information display: Select Radio£Show Station Information from theradio submenu.If the checkbox O is checked, stationinformation is displayed.

Program Informationi This feature is only available for analog

FM and digital AM/FM (HD Radio)programs.

Information on the current program isnormally displayed above the submenu line.X To display the program information in

the main area: Select Info in the radiodisplay submenu.Information on the program currently tunedto is now displayed in the main area. Thecontent and scope of the informationdepends on the radio station.

Satellite Radio

Important Notes In this chapter, you will find detailedinformation regardingRselecting a channel and a program categoryRmemory functionsRsound adjustmentsIf you have not done so already, pleasefamiliarize yourself with these functions byreading chapter “At a glance”.

i Optional satellite radio equipment and asubscription to satellite radio serviceprovider are required for the satellite radiooperation described here.

i Note that categories and channels shownin illustrations are dependent onprogramming content delivered by theservice provider. Programming content issubject to change. Therefore, channel andcategories shown in illustrations anddescriptions contained in this manual maydiffer from the channels and categoriesdelivered by the service provider.Satellite radio service may be unavailableor interrupted from time to time for avariety of reasons, such as environmentalor topographic conditions and other thingswe cannot control. Service might also notbe available in certain places (e.g., intunnels, parking garages, or within or nextto buildings) or near other technologies.

i SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio provides over130 channels of digital-quality radio,including 100% commercial-free music,sports, news and entertainment.SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio uses a fleet ofhigh-power satellites to broadcast 24 hoursper day, coast-to-coast, in the contiguousU.S and Canada.This diverse, satellite-deliveredprogramming is available for a monthlysubscription fee. For more information, callthe SIRIUS XM Service Center

Satellite Radio 127

Audi

o

Z

Page 130: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

(Y page 131) or contact www.sirius.com(USA) or www.siriuscanada.com (Canada).

Subscribing

Subscribing to Satellite RadioTo switch to satellite radio operation:X From another main function: SelectAudio£Audio£SatRadio.

i If radio mode was active last, you onlyneed to select Audio.

X Within the audio function: Select Audio£SatRadio.If the satellite radio service is not activated,the Satellite radio main menu appears anddisplays the Weather channel. You cannotselect any other station.

X Select SatRadio (from the submenu)£Service.The Service information display will appear.

Service information display1 Phone number of the provider,

(SIRIUS XM Radio)2 SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver

X Contact satellite radio service provider atthe telephone number displayed in thescreen.

i It is also possible to activate the satelliteservice online. To do so please visitSIRIUS XM Satellite Radio’s website at

www.sirius.com (USA) orwww.siriuscanada.com (Canada).

After the connection is made:X Follow the instructions given by the

operator.The activation process may take up to 10minutes. If it is successful, you will see thedisplay with the message No Servicefollowed by the Satellite radio main menu.

i If a subscription is not included withsystem purchase, credit card information isrequired to activate your account.If a satellite receiver is not installed or notproperly installed, the message Device Unavailable will appear.

Satellite Radio Operation i For many operating functions you can

also use the buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel, e.g. the =, ;, 9buttons, for selecting a channel or a menuor scrolling through lists (Y page 25).

Switching onSee “Subscribing to Satellite Radio” forimportant subscription information(Y page 128).To switch to satellite radio operation:X From another main function: SelectAudio£Audio£SatRadio.

i If radio mode was active last, you onlyneed to select Audio.

X Within the audio function: Select Audio£SatRadio.

i Satellite receiver not functional:The message Device Unavailable willappear in a window.

128 Satellite RadioAu

dio

Page 131: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

The message No Service will appear at startup or when the signal is not available.After the COMAND acquires the signal, theSatellite radio display will appear. The stationlast tuned to will begin to play.

Satellite radio main menu1 SatRadio main display2 Channel name3 Memory preset number4 Selected category/channel number5 Track info (short)6 Sound settings7 Category list8 Channel info (detailed)9 Preset channel lista SatRadio menu

i You can display 5 in full:RChannel information (Y page 131)

Changing the Category Satellite radio stations are split up intocategories. You can select between variouscategories such as News/Talk, Sports andCountry, if available. The category list issorted alphabetically.

Selecting a CategoryX To call up the category list: Rotate ymz

or slide omp until Category is highlightedin the submenu.

X Press n.The category list appears.

X To select a category: Rotate ymz or slideomp.

X To set the selected category: Press n.The selected category will appear in thedisplay. The channel last tuned to in thenew category will begin to play.At the beginning of the category list thecategory All Channels will appear. Thiscategory is sorted numerically (by channelnumbers) and allows you to scroll throughall available channels.

Selecting a Channel You can use the following functions:RChannel searchRChannel selection via direct entryRSelecting a channel from the SatRadio

channel listRSelection from the preset menu

Channel SearchX Rotate ymz or slide omp if the SatRadio

main display is highlighted.orX Press E or F on the control unit.

The search proceeds upwards ordownwards and stops at the next channelin the selected category.

Satellite Radio 129

Audi

o

Z

Page 132: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

SatRadio MenuX On the submenu bar rotate ymz or slideomp until SatRadio is highlighted.

X Press n.

The SatRadio menu appears.

Entering a Channel Number DirectlyX Select SatRadio£Enter Channel in the

SatRadio menu.An input dialog appears.

orX Press l on the control unit.X To enter a channel: Press corresponding

number buttons on the control unit.COMAND will tune to the channel entered.

i You can only select numbers that arecurrently permissible.

Selecting a Channel from the SatRadio Channel ListX Select SatRadio£Channel List in the

SatRadio menu.The channel list appears.

X To select a channel: Rotate ymz or slideqmr

X To tune to the selected channel: Press n.

Memory Functions i There are 10 presets available.You can use the following functions:

RStoring channelsRSelecting a channel from the Satellite

preset memory

Storing ChannelsX Press n if the main area is highlighted.orX Select Presets on the SatRadio submenu

bar.In both cases, the channel memory willappear. The dot R in front of a presetindicates that the currently tuned channelis stored there.

Channel Memory

X To select a preset: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To store a channel to a selected preset: Press and hold n until a signal tonesounds.

orX Press and hold a number key, e.g. 4, until

a signal tone sounds.The channel is stored.

Selecting a Channel from the Memory ListX To call up the channel list: In the

submenu rotate ymz or slide omp untilPresets is highlighted.The presets list appears.

X To select a channel: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To tune to the selected channel:

130 Satellite RadioAu

dio

Page 133: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Press n.orX Press a number key, e. g. 4 on the control

unit.

Displaying Information X In the submenu rotate ymz or slide omp

until Info is highlighted.X Press n.

Information about the current programappears.

1 Category2 Channel3 Artist4 Song titleYou will see (if available)Rthe full nameRadditional informationX To switch back to the SatRadio main

display: Slide omp.

Displaying Service InformationYou can call the provider service center forquestions or releases whenever you need.X Select SatRadio£Service in the

SatRadio submenu.The service information appears.

1 Phone number of the provider, (SIRIUSXM) or Call Service Provider

2 SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver

X To switch back to the SatRadio main display: Slide omp.

Channel List Updates While receiving a new channel list themessage Updating Channels will appear.The channel last tuned to will be muted untilthe update is completed. You cannot operatethe satellite radio.After completion of the update, the Satelliteradio main menu will appear. The channel lasttuned to will begin to play if available in thenew channel list.

Sound SettingsRefer to chapter “At a glance” on how toadjust sound settings.RVolume (Y page 35)RBalance and fader control (Y page 35)RBass and treble control (Y page 35)RSurround sound (Y page 36)

CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3

Safety Instructions

G WarningCOMAND is classified as a Class 1 laserproduct. You must not open the casing. There

CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3 131

Audi

o

Z

Page 134: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

is a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiationif you open the casing, or if the casing is faultyor damaged.COMAND does not contain any parts that youare able to maintain yourself. For safetyreasons, all maintenance work must beexclusively carried out by qualifiedtechnicians.

G WarningOnly carry out the following when the vehicleis stationary:RInserting a discREjecting a disc

There is a risk of accident by being distractedfrom road and traffic conditions if you load aCD/DVD while the vehicle is in motion.

Notes on MP3 Mode

Permissible Storage MediaRCD-R and CD-RWRDVD+R and DVD+RWRDVD-R and DVD-RWRPCMCIA memory card

Permissible File SystemsRISO9660/Joliet for CD storage mediaRUDF for DVDsRFAT16 or FAT32 for PCMCIA memory card

with storage medium

Multisession CDs On multisession CDs, the content of the firstsession determines how COMAND handlesthe CD.If the first session, for example, contains datain CD Audio format and the second sessioncontains MP3 tracks, COMAND handles theCD as a conventional Audio CD. This meansthat the MP3 tracks cannot be accessed.

Similarly, if the first session contains MP3tracks and the second session contains datain CD Audio format, COMAND handles the CDas an MP3 CD. Only the MP3 tracks can beaccessed.

File Structure of Storage MediumWhen creating an MP3 storage medium, youcan organize MP3 tracks into folders. A foldercan also contain additional folders. A storagemedium may have a maximum of 255 foldersin total. A maximum of 255 tracks and 255folders are permissible per folder. Amaximum of 4000 tracks in total arepermissible per storage medium.

Track Names and Folder Names When creating an MP3 storage medium, youcan assign names to the MP3 tracks and tothe folders.COMAND uses these names in MP3 mode forthe corresponding display. Empty folders orfolders containing data other than MP3 trackswill not be displayed by COMAND.If MP3 files are stored in the root directoryitself, the root directory also counts as afolder. COMAND will then display the rootdirectory name as a folder name.Please note the following when assigningtrack names:RTrack names must contain at least one

character.RTrack names must have the extension

“mp3”.RA period must appear between the track

name and the extension.

i COMAND does not support ID3 tags.

Permissible Formats COMAND supports the following formats:RMPEG1 audio layer 3 format

132 CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3Au

dio

Page 135: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

i In everyday speech, this formatdesignation has been replaced by thedesignation “MP3”.RMicrosoft Windows® Media Audio V2, V7,

V8 und V9 (WMA).

Notes on Copyright The music tracks that you can create forplayback in MP3 mode are generallycopyright-protected under applicableinternational and national laws.In many countries, the reproduction ofcopyrighted material is not permitted even ifonly for personal use without the expressprior consent of the copyright holder.Please check the current copyright laws foryour country and comply with them.These restrictions do not apply, for example,to your own compositions and recordings orfor recordings for which authorization hasbeen obtained from the copyright holder.

Notes about DVD Audio Discs COMAND can playback commerciallyavailable, prerecorded Audio DVDs that bearthe following label. You will usually find thelabel on the DVD booklet, the inlay or the DVDitself.

i Audio DVDs differ from recordable DVD-Rand DVD-RW discs.

Data on Audio DVDs are stored either inuncompressed format or in losslesscompressed format. The sound quality onAudio DVDs is therefore better than onrecordable DVDs that contain MP3 databecause the MP3 format uses a lossy type ofcompression. You cannot delete data from or

record additional data to commerciallyavailable, prerecorded Audio DVDs. Pleasenote the following information about CDs/DVDs and pay special attention to the noteson copied and/or self-written CDs/DVDs.

Permissible Bit and Sampling Rates RFixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbps to

320 kbpsRSampling rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHz

i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of128 kbps or higher and with a sampling rateof 44.1 kHz or higher. Lower rates mayresult in impaired sound quality. This isparticularly true if the surround soundfunction has been activated.

WMA (Windows® Media Audio) format of thefollowing type:Rfixed bit rates from 5 kBit/s up to

384 kBit/sRsampling rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.COMAND does not support WMA files of thefollowing type:RDRM (Digital Rights Management)

encrypted files

i If other music files are stored in theseaudio formats on a storage medium, inaddition to MP3 files, the loading processmay take longer before the first track isplayed.

Notes about CD/DVD Discs i Discs with copy protection do not comply

with the CD Audio standard and in somecases cannot be played by COMAND. Whenplaying copied discs, problems may occurwith the playback.

A wide variety of discs, disc writing softwareand writers are available. Due to this varietywe cannot guarantee that the system will beable to play discs that you have written/copied yourself.

CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3 133

Audi

o

Z

Page 136: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

There may be playback problems withuserburned CDs with a storage capacity ofmore than 700 MB. These CDs do not meetcurrent valid standards.

i When playing a DVD Audio, it may be thecase with numerous albums that the lasttrack does not contain any music andCOMAND switches to the next track. Thisis due to the production method and doesnot imply a fault with the unit.

! Do not attach stickers or labels of anykind to discs. They may come loose anddamage COMAND.COMAND has been designed for discsmeeting the requirements of standardEN 60908. Therefore, only discs with amaximum thickness of 1.3 mm can beused.If a thicker disc is inserted, e.g. one whichstores data on both sides, (DVD on oneside, audio data on the other side), thiscannot be ejected and COMAND will bedamaged.Do not use 8 cm diameter discs, not evenwith an adapter. Only use round discs witha diameter of 12 cm.

i COMAND can play CD Audio with the highresolution surround format.

Notes on the Care of CD/DVD Discs ROnly touch the discs at the edges.RHandle discs with care in order to prevent

malfunctions during playback.RAvoid scratching, leaving fingerprints and

dust on the discs.RClean the discs occasionally with a

commercially available cleaning cloth.Always wipe in a straight line from theinside outwards, never in a circular motion.RThe discs must only be labelled using pens

specially designed for this purpose.

RAfter use, put the discs back into the box.RProtect the discs from heat and direct

sunlight.

Loading CDs and DVDs

G WarningOnly load a CD or DVD when the vehicle isstationary. There is a risk of accident by beingdistracted from road and traffic conditions ifyou load a CD/DVD while the vehicle is inmotion.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(appr. 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering adistance of 44 feet (appr. 14 m) every second.

i If the CD/DVD is printed on one side, thisside must face upwards when loaded. Ifneither side is printed, the side to be playedmust face downwards.The system may not be able to play copy-protected CDs/DVDs.

Loading the DVD Changer The DVD changer is a magazine with six built-in compartments.

1 Load/Eject button (all magazinecompartments)

2 Disc slot

134 CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3Au

dio

Page 137: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Loading an Individual Magazine CompartmentX Press the Load V button.

A menu indicates which magazinecompartments are currently loaded. Thehighlighted or currently playingcompartment is indicated by a red number.

Magazine Menu

X To select magazine compartment: Rotate ymzor slide omp.

X To start loading: Press n.The DVD changer will switch to the selectedmagazine compartment. The messagePlease Wait... will be displayed.Then message Please Insert Disc <x> will be displayed.

i Only insert a CD after COMAND hasprompted you to do so with this message.Only insert one CD per magazinecompartment.

X Insert a disc into the slot with the printedside upwards.The DVD changer pulls in the disc andplaces it in the selected magazinecompartment. The message Loading Disc <x> will be displayed.

i The loading process may take a while,depending on the type of disc. If you do notinsert a disc, the display will switch back tothe magazine menu after approximately20 seconds.

The DVD changer plays the disc ifRit has been inserted correctlyRit is a permissible disc

Magazine menu, one disc loaded1 Magazine compartment occupied,

ejecting possible2 Empty magazine compartment

X To exit menu: Press the Load V buttonagain.

orX Select BackorX Press the k button

Filling Empty Magazine CompartmentsX Press the Load V button.

The magazine menu appears. The currentlyplaying compartment is indicated by a red

CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3 135

Audi

o

Z

Page 138: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

number or, if the magazine is empty,compartment 1 is marked.

X Select Fill Empty Slots.The message Please insert disc <x>will be displayed.

i Only insert a CD after COMAND hasprompted you to do so with this message.Only insert one CD per magazinecompartment.

X Insert a disc into the slot with the printedside facing upwards.You see the Please wait... message.Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changerswitches to the next empty compartment.You see these messages: Please waitand then Please insert disc <x>.

X Repeat the step until all compartments areloaded.The DVD changer plays the last disc youloaded if it has been inserted correctly andif it is a permissible type.If loading is not completed, COMAND playsthe first disc inserted.

X To end loading procedure: Press the LoadV button again.

orX Select Back.orX Press the k button next to the

COMAND controller.

Loading PCMCIA Memory Card

G WarningOnly load a memory card when the vehicle isstationary. There is a risk of accident by beingdistracted from road and traffic conditions ifyou load a memory card while the vehicle isin motion.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(appr. 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering adistance of 44 feet (appr. 14 m) every second.

COMAND supports 16-bit full-size type I and IIPCMCIA memory cards.

i COMAND supports commerciallyavailable PCMCIA cards or PCMCIA cardadapters with storage media that may notbe designed for the temperatures whichoccur in the vehicle. You should thereforeremove the PCMCIA card from the vehiclewhen not in use since extremetemperatures could damage these devices.

1 PCMCIA memory card slot

X Push the PCMCIA memory card into theslot.The end with the contact must pointtowards the slot.COMAND loads the memory card anddisplays the message Reading Memory Card. If no MP3 tracks can be found, amessage will be displayed.

Ejecting CDs and DVDs

G WarningOnly load a CD or DVD when the vehicle isstationary. There is a risk of accident by beingdistracted from road and traffic conditions ifyou load a CD/DVD while the vehicle is inmotion.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(appr. 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering adistance of 44 feet (appr. 14 m) every second.

136 CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3Au

dio

Page 139: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

i If you eject a disc while another is beingplayed, the DVD changer interruptsplayback. Playback will continue once thedisc has been ejected completely.

Ejecting One DiscX Press Eject V button.

The magazine menu appears. The magazinecompartment containing the current disc ishighlighted.

1 Magazine compartment occupied,ejecting possible

2 Disc type3 Disc name (only if stored on disc)4 Current disc

X To select occupied magazine compartment: Rotate ymz or slide omp.

X Press n.The Ejecting disc <x>... messageappears. Then you see the followingmessage:

X Remove the disc from the slot.If you do not remove the disc from the slot,the DVD changer will automatically pull itback in after a short while and resumeplayback.

Ejecting All DiscsX Press the Eject V button.

The magazine menu appears.

X Select Eject All.The DVD changer ejects the first discfound. The message Ejecting disc <x>... is displayed.

X Remove the disc from the slot when yousee the message prompting you to do this.The DVD changer switches to the nextoccupied magazine compartment andejects the disc.

X Repeat the last step until the magazine isempty.

Ejecting a PCMCIA Memory Card

G WarningOnly load a memory card when the vehicle isstationary. There is a risk of accident by beingdistracted from road and traffic conditions ifyou load a memory card while the vehicle isin motion.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(appr. 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering adistance of 44 feet (appr. 14 m) every second.

CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3 137

Audi

o

Z

Page 140: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

1 Eject button2 PCMCIA memory card slot

X Press Eject button 1 twice.The PCMCIA memory card is ejected.

X Take the PCMCIA memory card out ofslot 2.

Menu Overview

CD or DVD-A orMP3

Only with DVD-A:«/±/X

Track list orFolder

Media Sound

Normal tracksequence

« Pauseplayback

Display track list(CD Audio/DVD Audiomode only)

Media selectionvia media listRCD/DVD

ChangerRMemory CardRMusic

RegisterRMedia

InterfaceRAux

Treble

Random tracks ± Stopplayback

Folder list (MP3mode only)

Bass

Random folder(MP3 modeonly)

X Restart orcontinueplayback

Balance/Fader

Switches the CDdatabasereading functionon/off (CDmode only)

Surround sound

138 CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3Au

dio

Page 141: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Switching to CD Audio, DVD Audio or MP3 Mode

From the Control PanelX Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 134) or a PCMCIA

memory card (Y page 136).COMAND loads the medium inserted andbegins playback.

orX Press the h function button.

i Pressing the function button switchesdirectly to the disc mode selected last(CD Audio, DVD Audio, MP3-CD or DVDVideo). COMAND then accesses all discs inthe DVD changer, the memory card or theMusic Register.

X If necessary, select CD/DVD Audio/ MP3media (Y page 141).

orX When playing a video DVD: Open the

media list as described in "Selecting DVDmedia" (Y page 141).

X Select an audio storage medium.This switches to the required disc mode.

Via the COMAND Controller

From Another Main FunctionX Select Audio£Audio£Disc orMemory Card or Music Register in theaudio menu display.

i If the desired mode is also the last activemode, you only need to select Audio.

Within the Audio FunctionX Select Audio£Disc or Memory card in

the audio menu display.

i Disc accesses audio discs in the DVDchanger. Memory Card selects the slot forthe PCMCIA memory card.

X Select CD/DVD Audio/MP3 as required(Y page 141).The desired disc mode is activated.

Example of CD Audio Mode Display

1 Disc type _2 Track number3 Track name (only if stored on the disc as

CD text or available from Gracenote®)4 Elapsed track time5 Visual track and time display6 Current playback option7 Sound settings8 Media selection9 Disc name (only if stored on the disc as

CD text or available from Gracenote®)a Display track listb Disc position in the media listc Disc or track recordingd Playback options

CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3 139

Audi

o

Z

Page 142: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Example of DVD Audio Display

1 Disc type ü2 Track number3 Track name (if available)4 Elapsed track time5 Visual time and track display6 Current playback option7 Sound settings8 Media selection9 Disc name (if available)a Display track listb Stop functionc Pause functiond Disc position in the media liste Playback options

Example display in MP3 mode

1 Disc type þ or º (memory card)2 Track number3 Track or file name4 Elapsed track time5 Visual time and track display

6 Current playback option7 Sound settings8 Media selection9 Current foldera Display folder listb Disc position in the media listc Playback options

i An example of a media list display can befound on (Y page 141).

Stop Function i This function is only available in DVD

Audio mode.

X Switch to DVD Audio mode.X To interrupt playback: Select ±.

The display « changes to X.X To resume playback: Select X.

Playback continues from the point where itwas interrupted.

X To stop playback: Select ± again whenplayback is interrupted.

orX Select ± twice during playback.

Option selector remains at X.X To restart playback: Select X.

Playback starts from the beginning of theDVD.

Pause Function

In CD Audio, DVD Audio and MP3 Mode X To pause playback: Briefly press 8.X appears at the top left of the status bar.

X To continue playback: Briefly press8 again.Playback continues from the point where itwas paused. X disappears.

140 CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3Au

dio

Page 143: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Only in DVD Audio modeX To pause playback: Switch to DVD Audio

mode.X Select «.

The display « changes to X.X To resume playback: Switch to DVD

Audio mode.Playback continues from the point where itwas paused.

X Select X.The display X changes to «.

Selecting CD/DVD Audio/MP3 MediaX In CD Audio, DVD Audio and MP3

mode: Select Media.orX In CD Audio and DVD Audio mode only:

Press n when the main area is highlighted.The media list appears. The dot Rindicates the medium currently playing.

Media List

The media list shows the discs currentlyavailable:RIn the DVD changer (magazine

compartments 1 to 6)The following storage media can be read:_ CD Audio, þ MP3-CD or MP3-DVD,ü DVD Audio and ý DVD Video

i If a storage medium is not readable, anentry appears next to the magazine

compartment or a message is displayedwhen the memory card is selected.RPCMCIA memory card º at position 7RMusic Register Ñ at position 8

X To select a disc: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X Press n.

i If you select a DVD Video ý, COMANDswitches to video mode (Y page 158).

Selecting a Track i For many operating functions you can

also use the buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel, e.g. the 9, :buttons, for selecting a track, a menu orscrolling through lists (Y page 25).

Selection via Track Skip X To skip forwards or backwards to a

track: Rotate ymz when the main area ishighlighted.

orX Press the E or F button.

i “Forward track skip” skips to the nexttrack. “Backward track skip” skips to thebeginning of the current track, if the trackhas been playing for more than 8 seconds.If the track has been playing for less than8 seconds, it will skip to the beginning ofthe previous track. If the playback optionRandom Tracks is switched on, the tracksequence is random.

CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3 141

Audi

o

Z

Page 144: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Selecting via Track ListX In CD Audio and DVD Audio mode: SelectTrack List.

orX In MP3 mode: Press n when the main

area window is highlighted.The track list appears. The R dot indicatesthe current track.

X To select a track: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X Press n.

i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracksin alphabetical order.

Fast Forward/Reverse X When the main area is highlighted: Slide

and hold omp until the desired position isreached.

orX Press and hold the E or F button

until the desired position has beenreached.

Selecting Folders i This function is only available in MP3

mode.

X Switch to MP3 mode (Y page 139).X Select Folder.orX Press n when the main area is highlighted.

The folder list appears.

1 Current folder name2 Track symbol3 Current track4 Back folder symbol

X To switch to the next folder up: Selectthe Q symbol.The display changes to the next folder up(back folder).

1 Disc name (if stored on disc)2 Current folder3 Folder symbol

X To select a folder: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X Press n.The tracks of the folder appear.

X To select a track: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X Press n.The track is played and the correspondingfolder is now the active folder.

142 CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3Au

dio

Page 145: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Gracenote® Media Database i This function is only available in CD Audio

mode.CD information including album title, artistname and track name is obtained from theGracenote® Media Database. A version of theGracenote® Media Database is stored on theCOMAND’s hard drive. Access to thisdatabase is indicated by the Gracenote logobeing displayed in the lower right of someaudio displays.

Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMANDuses the information contained in this text fordisplaying the name of the artist, album andtrack.If the audio CD does not contain any CD text,COMAND can recognize unknown audiotracks in CD Audio mode with the aid of theGracenote Media Database. For this tohappen, the corresponding information mustbe stored in the Gracenote Media Databaseand the “Read CD Database” function mustbe switched on.If this is the case, COMAND provides thecorresponding data, such as name of artist,album and track, in the correspondingdisplays and lists.If COMAND accesses the Gracenote MediaDatabase while reading an audio CD, thefollowing information is displayed:

Switching "Read CD Database" Function On and OffX Switch to CD Audio mode (Y page 139).X Select CD£Read CD Database.

A list opens from which you can select thedesired data. Select None if you do not wantto display any of the data.

Updating the Gracenote® Media Database As new music CD releases occur it isnecessary to update the Gracenote MediaDatabase. Optimum Gracenote® musicrecognition function is only achieved whenthe most up-to-date database is available inyour vehicle.You can have the music recognition softwareupdated at an Authorized Mercedes-Benzcenter by means of a DVD or perform theupdate process yourself.

i The Gracenote® Media Database isupdated at the same time as the mapsoftware (Y page 48).

Setting Audio Format It is only possible to set the audio format inDVD Audio mode. The number of availableaudio formats depends on the DVD. Thecontent of a DVD Audio is called the “album”,which can be divided into a maximum of ninegroups. A group may contain, for example,music of different sound qualities (stereo and

CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3 143

Audi

o

Z

Page 146: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

multi-channel formats) or bonus tracks. Eachgroup can include up to 99 tracks. If a DVDAudio only comprises one audio format, the“Group” menu item(s) cannot be selected.X Switch to DVD Audio mode (Y page 139).X Select DVD-A£Group.

The list of available audio formats appears.The dot R indicates the format currentlyselected.

X To change setting: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X Press n.

Playback Options The following options are available:RNormal Track Sequence

You will hear the tracks in the normal order(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).RRandom Tracks

You will hear the tracks in random order(e.g. track 3, 8, 5, etc.).RRandom Folder (MP3 mode only)

You hear the tracks in the currently activefolder and any subfolders in random order.

X To select an option: Switch to CD Audio,DVD Audio or MP3 mode (Y page 139).

X Select CD or DVD-A or MP3.The option list appears. A dot R indicatesthe option selected.

X Select an option.The option is activated. For all optionsexcept Normal Track Sequence, you willsee a corresponding display in the mainarea.

i The Normal Track Sequence option isautomatically selected when you changethe medium you are currently listening toor when you select a different medium. Ifan option is selected, it remains selectedafter COMAND is switched on or off.

Music Register

You can record tracks from Audio CDs andstore them in the Music Register. Thememory capacity is 6 GB.

! Keep your original music files in a safeplace. A fault with the COMAND may causethe music files stored in the Music Registerto be lost. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC is notliable for any loss of data.

Switching to the Music Register

From Another Main FunctionX Select Audio£Audio£Music Register in the Audio menu display.

i If Music Register was the last mode,you only need to select Audio.

Within the Audio FunctionX Select Audio£Music Register.

Music Register is loaded. The MusicRegister display appears.

No music files available:A message will be displayed.X First record music files from an Audio CD

(Y page 145).Music files available:You will hear the first track of the first folderfound or playback will start from the pointlistened to last.

144 Music RegisterAu

dio

Page 147: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

1 Storage media type — Music Register Ñ2 Track number3 Track name4 Elapsed track time5 Visual time and track display6 Current playback option7 Sound settings8 Media selection9 Current foldera Folder functionsb Storage medium position in the media listc Calls up Music Register menu

Recording Music Files i CD information, including album title,

artist name and track name is obtainedfrom the Gracenote® Media Database(Y page 143).

X In the Disc submenu with Audio CDinserted, select REC. The Record submenuappears.

Selecting Tracks to Be RecordedX Rotate ymz or slide omp until Tracks is

highlighted.X Press n.X Select tracks to be recorded by switching

the check mark next to each track entry onor off.

1 Record all tracks (default); Option for selecting individual tracks= Confirm selection

i If you do not select individual tracksbefore recording, all tracks on the CD willbe recorded.

Selecting a Destination FolderX Rotate ymz or slide omp untilDestination Folder is highlighted.

X Press n.

Selection list1 Create new folder (default)2 Existing folders3 Currently active folder

X To select folder: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X Press n.

i If you do not select a destination folderbefore recording, a new folder will becreated.

Music Register 145

Audi

o

Z

Page 148: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Start the RecordingX Rotate ymz or slide omp until Start is

highlighted.X Press n.

In the display information about source,destination and progress of the recordingis shown.

i The Disc menu re-appears automaticallyafter a successful recording.

X To stop the recording: Rotate ymz orslide omp until Cancel is highlighted..

X Press n.The Disc menu re-appears.

Deleting all Music Files This function deletes all music files fromMusic Register.X Select Music Register£Delete All Music Files.A prompt appears. No is highlighted.

X Do not delete: Press the n button.The Music Register display appears.

X To delete: Select Yes.A corresponding message appears.

Calling up Memory Space Info X Select Music Register£Memory Info.

A window appears containing information on:RMemory capacityRAvailable memoryROccupied memoryRContent (folders, tracks)

Folder Functions You can view the content of Music Register,change folder or track names and deleteindividual folders or tracks.X Select Folder in the submenu.orX Press n when the main area is highlighted.

1 Back folder symbol2 Current folder3 Music file symbol

X To switch to the next folder up: Selectthe Q symbol.The display changes to the next folder up.

Changing Folder/Track NameX Select Folder.X To select a folder/track: Rotate ymz or

slide qmr.X Select Options£Change.X Enter a name for the folder/track in the

input line.X To save changes: Select d.

146 Music RegisterAu

dio

Page 149: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Deleting Folders/TrackX Select Folder.X To select a folder/track: Rotate ymz or

slide qmr.X Select Options£Delete.

A query appears. No is highlighted.X Do not delete: Press the n button.X To delete: Select Yes and press n.

A message appears.

Playback Options The following options are available:RNormal Track Sequence

You will hear the tracks in the normalsequence (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.).RRandom Tracks:

You hear the tracks in random order.RRandom Folder

The tracks of the currently active folder andany subfolders are heard in random order.

X To select an option: Switch to MusicRegister (Y page 144).

X Select Music Register in the submenu.The option list appears. A R dot indicatesthe activated option.

X Select an option.The option is activated. A correspondingdisplay will appear in the main area for alloptions except Normal Track Sequence.

i The option Normal Track Sequence isautomatically activated if you change themedium which is currently being played orif you select another medium. An activatedoption remains active after COMAND isswitched on or off.

Media Interface

Important Notes

Connection Options Via the UCI connection (Universal ConsumerInterface) you can connect the followingmedia to COMAND:RiPodsRMP3 playerRUSB devices

Supported iPod® VersionsThe following iPod® versions are fullysupported:RiPod® miniRiPod® nanoRiPod® classicRiPod® touch

Supported USB DevicesThe following USB devices are supported:RUSB sticks (flash memory)RUSB hard drives (1-inch, 1.8-inch and

2.5-inch drives) with a starting/continuouscurrent rating of maximum 800 mA(otherwise a separate power supply will benecessary)

i The Media Interface supports USBstorage media of "USB Device Subclass 6".You can obtain information about the "USBDevice Subclass 6" from the manufacturer.

Further Information on Supported DevicesFurther information on compatiblemultimedia devices is available via theInternet at www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or callthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (US), or CustomerRelations at 1-800-387-0100 (Canada).

Media Interface 147

Audi

o

Z

Page 150: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Supported Data Formats (USB devices) The following data types are supported:RMP3: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s)RWMA: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s)In order to display the metadata duringplayback, ID3 tags (version 1.x, 2.3, 2.4) andWMA tags in ASCII and UTF16 coding aresupported.

Notes on USB DevicesRIn order to keep the initialisation time short,

do not store data other than music files onthe USB device.RUp to eight directory levels with up to 1,000

tracks are supported.RDo not use a USB extension cable or

adapter. These may impair functionality.RPlaylists are searched for in the

background on the USB device and, ifavailable, are offered beside folders in aseparate category.RYou can only use USB devices formatted

with the file system format FAT (FileAllocation Table).

i Files protected with DRM (Digital RightsManagement) are not supported by theMedia Interface.

Connecting External Devices You will find the connection sockets in theglove compartment.Never connect more than one device at atime. Please consult a Mercedes-BenzService Center for further information.

i Do not leave external devices in thevehicle, as functionality cannot beguaranteed above certain temperatures(such as inside a vehicle in direct sunlight).Mercedes-Benz does not takeresponsibility for any damage to externaldevices.

1 Connection socket for 1/8 inch jack plug,for MP3 players, for example.

2 iPod® plug for connecting an iPod®

3 USB socket for connecting a USB device4 Example device: iPod®

X Connect the external device usingappropriate connection 1, 2 or 3.Never connect more than one device at atime. You will otherwise not be able to playback from the external device.COMAND activates the device.

If you remove a device, the No Device Connected message appears.

i The connected iPod® or USB deviceshould not be operated with a remotecontrol (such as a Bluetooth remotecontrol) while it is being operated withMedia Interface, as this could causeunforeseen technical difficulties.

i The initialisation period may be extendedif you connect an iPod® or USB devicewhich has a fully discharged battery.

i Error messages appear while the deviceis being activated if:Ryou have connected two devices at the

same timeRCOMAND does not support the device

connectedRthe device connected consumes too

much powerRthe Media Interface connection is

defective

148 Media InterfaceAu

dio

Page 151: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

If necessary, consult a Mercedes-BenzService Center.

Switching to Media Interface

From Another Main FunctionX Select Audio£Audio£Media Interface in the audio menu display.

i If you previously selected operation withMedia Interface, you need only selectAudio.

orX Press the h function button.

Switch on the previous disc operatingmode.

i If you previously selected operation withMedia Interface, it will now be switched on.

X Select Media.The media list appears. The R dotindicates the current medium being played.

X Rotate ymz or slide qmr until the positionof Media Interface is highlighted in themedia list.

i If no device is connected, you will see theentry Media Interface instead of adevice name.

X Press n.COMAND activates the connected device(only for iPods and USB devices). You willsee a corresponding message. The basicdisplay then appears.

Example display: iPod® operation1 Device type2 Track number3 Track name4 Visual elapsed track time5 Numeric elapsed track time (also in

format 00:00:00 for audiobooks)6 Visual track display7 Current playback option8 Sound settings9 Media lista Album name, if availableb Categories, playlists and/or foldersc Artist, if availabled Playback options

i If the device connected does not containany playable tracks, a correspondingmessage appears.

Within the Audio FunctionX Connect an external device (Y page 148).

COMAND activates the device. The basicdisplay appears.

orX Select Audio£Media Interface.

i The type of device 1 that has beenconnected is indicated by thecorresponding icons for iPod®, MP3 playeror USB mass storage device.

Media Interface 149

Audi

o

Z

Page 152: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Selecting Music Files i COMAND displays the data stored on the

iPod®, MP3 player or USB mass storagedevice in the storage structure used in themedium in question.

Selecting by Skipping to a TrackX To skip forwards or backwards to a

track: Slide omp.orX Press the F or E button.

i Skipping forwards skips to the next track.Skipping backwards skips to the beginningof the current track if the track has beenplaying for more than 8 seconds. If thetrack has been playing for less than 8seconds, it skips to the start of the previoustrack. If you have selected a playbackoption other than Normal Track Sequence, the track sequence is random.

Selecting by Manual Track Number EntryX To make an entry: Press the l button.

An input menu appears. The number ofpossible input places depends on thenumber of tracks stored.

X To enter a track number: Press a numberkey, such as s.The number is entered in the first positionin the input line.

i If an invalid number is entered, COMANDwill ignore it and it will not be displayed.

X Enter more numbers if desired.X To confirm your entry: Press the n

button.The selected track is played.

Fast forward/rewindX When the main area is highlighted, slide

and hold omp until the desired position hasbeen reached.

orX Press and hold the F or E button

until the desired position has beenreached.

Selecting a Category/Playlist/Folder

iPods and MP3 PlayersYou can select tracks by category for iPodsand by folder for MP3 players.Depending on the connected device, thecategories may include:RCurrent track listRPlaylists (e.g. All, My top 25 or Music videos)RArtistsRAlbumsRPodcastsRAudiobooksRGenresRComposersi Some playback categories contain theAll entry. Further entries of this type canfollow depending on the hierarchy level.After selecting a title at the track level, theentire content of the category selected willbe played.

USB DevicesFor USB mass storage devices, you can selectfolders and also playlists (if available).COMAND can also display the album nameand artist (“metadata”) during playback, ifthis information has previously been entered.Playlists are shown in the display with aparticular icon. When you open the playlist,

150 Media InterfaceAu

dio

Page 153: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

the selected tracks are opened and playbackbegins.For USB mass storage devices, you candetermine whether metadata from the tags inthe coded music data should be displayed orwhether the file name and directory should bedisplayed during playback.X Select Media Interface £Display Metadata.

Selecting a Category and Opening a FolderX To open a category list/folder: Press n

when the main area is highlighted.orX Select Music.

You will see the available categories or thefolder content (e.g. other folders).

i The Music menu item is not available untilthe device has been activated.

1 Device name and device icon2 Selectable categories

X To select a category/folder: Slide qmrand confirm with n.You will see the content of the selectedcategory or selected folder.

i You may see the Please wait...message beforehand.

X If necessary, repeat this operating stepuntil the tracks in the desired folder appear.

1 Symbol for back folder2 Current category3 Track icon4 Current track

X To select a track: Slide qmr and confirmwith n.The track is played.

orX Select an album or folder and confirm withn.

X To select a track: Slide qmr and confirmwith n.After that, the first track of the album/folder is played.

X To switch to the next folder up: Selectthe Q icon.

i The Q icon is always listed right at thetop of the folder in question.

Playing the Content of a Category or FolderX Select a category or folder.X Press n for longer than two seconds.

The content of the category or folderselected is played in accordance with theplayback option (Y page 152) selected.

Media Interface 151

Audi

o

Z

Page 154: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Alphabetical Track Selection

iPods and MP3 Playersi This function is available for categories

which are arranged in alphabetical order.This function is not available withinplaylists, for example.

X Select a category, e.g. artists.The available artists appear.

X Press the corresponding number key onceor repeatedly to select the initial letter ofthe desired artist. For example, to select anartist whose name begins with C, press thenumber key "2" three times.You see the available letters at the bottomedge of the display.After a message, the first entry in the listwhich matches the letter entered ishighlighted.

i If there is no entry which matches theletter which has been entered, the lastentry in the list which matches a previousletter is highlighted.

USB Devicesi This function is available for directories

which are arranged in alphabetical order.This function is not available withinplaylists.

X Press the number key in question once orrepeatedly in a directory to select the initialletter of the desired artist.For example, to select an artist whosename begins with C, press the number key“2” three times.You see the available letters at the bottomedge of the display.If the directory only contains folders,COMAND searches for folders. The firstentry in the list that matches the letter ishighlighted.If this does not happen, COMAND searchesfor tracks. After a message, the first entry

in the list which matches the letter enteredis highlighted.

i If there is no entry which matches theletter which has been entered, the lastentry in the list which matches a previousletter is highlighted.

Selecting the Active Partition (USB Devices Only)

You can select this function for USB deviceswhen the storage device is partitioned. Up tofour partitions (primary or logical and FAT-formatted) are supported.

i The Windows formatting programsupports FAT partitions with either FAT16or FAT32.

X Select Media Interface£Select Active partition.

Playback Options The following options are available to you:RNormal Track Sequence:

You hear the tracks in their normal order(numerical or alphabetical).RRandom Tracks:

You hear all tracks in random order.RRandom Categories or Random Folder

(in the case of USB devices when Folderhas been selected):You hear the tracks in the current activecategory or folder and any subfolders inrandom order.

X To select an option: Select Media Interface in the basic display.The option list appears. A R dot indicatesthe option selected.

X Select an option.

152 Media InterfaceAu

dio

Page 155: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Audio Aux

An external audio source (Aux) can beconnected to COMAND via the 1/8 inch jack1 located inside the glovebox.

Switching to Audio Aux Mode

From Another Main FunctionX Select Audio£Audio£Aux in the audio

menu display.

i If the last mode was audio Aux mode, youonly need to select Audio.

Within the Audio FunctionX Select Audio£Aux.

The Audio Aux menu appears. The mediumin the external audio source is heard,provided it is connected and switched toplayback.

i Please see the corresponding operatinginstructions for how to operate the externalaudio source.

You can set the following in audio Aux mode:RVolume (Y page 35)RBalance and fader (Y page 35)RTreble and bass (Y page 35)RSurround sound (Y page 36)

G WarningDue to the different volumes of the externalaudio sources, system messages (e.g.navigation announcements) may be muchlouder. You may need to disable these systemmessages or adjust the volume of thesemessages manually.

i The volume of external audio sources isextremely variable. It is possible that adevice connected as an external audiosource will sound quieter or louder in thevehicle or that the usual maximum volumecannot be achieved. On certain devices thevolume can be set separately. In this case,start at a moderate volume and increase itslowly. In this way, you can determinewhether the system is capable of playbackwithout distortion, even at high volume.

Audio Aux 153

Audi

o

Z

Page 156: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

154

Page 157: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

General Information ......................... 156Submenu Overview .......................... 157DVD Video .......................................... 158Video Aux .......................................... 163

155

Vide

o

Page 158: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

General Information

Safety Notes

G WarningCOMAND is classified as a Class 1 laserproduct. You must not open the casing. Thereis a risk of exposure to invisible laser radiationif you open the casing, or if the casing is faultyor damaged.COMAND does not contain any parts that youare able to maintain yourself. For safetyreasons, all maintenance work must beexclusively carried out by qualifiedtechnicians.

G WarningOnly carry out the following when the vehicleis stationary:RInserting a discREjecting a disc

There is a risk of accident by being distractedfrom road and traffic conditions if you load aCD/DVD while the vehicle is in motion.

Vehicle Equipmenti This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

Automatic Picture Switch-off The video picture is only displayed if thegearshift lever is in “P” position.When the gearshift lever is moved out of the“P” position, the following message isdisplayed: In order not to distract you from the traffic situation, the picture is faded out while the vehicle is in motion.

When the gearshift lever is moved back intothe “P” position, the picture switches backon.

Notes on Storage Media i When playing copied discs, problems may

occur with the playback. A wide variety ofdisc-writing software and writers areavailable. Due to this variety we cannotguarantee that the system will be able toplay discs that you have written/copiedyourself.

! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs,as they could peel off and damageCOMAND. Stickers can cause the disc tobend, which can result in read errors anddisc recognition problems.

! COMAND is designed to hold discs whichcomply with the EN 60908 standard. Youcan therefore only use discs with amaximum thickness of 1.3 mm.If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those thatcontain data on both sides (DVD on oneside and audio data on the other), theycannot be ejected and can damageCOMAND.Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm,even with an adapter. Only use round discswith a diameter of 12 cm.

Notes on the Care of Discs ROnly hold discs by the edge.RHandle discs with care in order to prevent

malfunctions during playback.RAvoid scratching, leaving fingerprints and

dust on the discs.RClean the discs occasionally with a

commercially available cleaning cloth.Always wipe in a straight line from theinside outwards, never in a circular motion.

156 General InformationVi

deo

Page 159: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RThe discs must only be labelled using pensspecially designed for this purpose.RAfter use, replace the discs into the sleeve.RProtect the discs from heat and direct

sunlight.

DVD Playback Conditions Some DVDs may not comply with the NTSCor PAL TV playback standards. Sound, pictureand other playback problems may occurwhen you play such DVDs.As standard, COMAND can play video DVDswhich meet the following criteria:RRegion code 1 or region code 0 (all regions)

i With a video DVD having another regioncode, a corresponding message will bedisplayed.RPAL or NTSC TV standardInformation on this can usually be foundeither on the DVD itself or on the DVD sleeve.

i The factory setting for COMAND is regioncode 1. An authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center can change this setting up to fivetimes. This will enable you to play videoDVDs with other region codes, providedthat they have been made to the PAL orNTSC TV standard.

Functional Restrictions It may be the case that some functions oractions may not be possible at certain times,or may not be possible in general, dependingon the DVD.When you activate such functions or actions,this is indicated by the 7 in the display.

Loading a DVDX Proceed as described in the “Loading CDs

and DVDs” section (Y page 134).

Ejecting a DVDX Proceed as described in the “Ejecting CDs

and DVDs” section (Y page 136).

Submenu Overview

DVD-Video «/X ± Media Sound

DVD functions « Pausesplayback

± Stopsplayback

Mediumselection

Treble

Brightness X Resumesplayback

Bass

Contrast X Restartsplayback

Balance/Fader

Color Surround sound

16:9 Optimized

4:3

Widescreen

Submenu Overview 157

Vide

o

Z

Page 160: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

DVD-Video «/X ± Media Sound

Active Aud./Vid.Source for the Rear

Rear Audio/VideoOff

DVD Video

Switching to DVD Video

From the Control PanelX Insert a DVD Video (Y page 134).

COMAND loads the medium inserted andstarts playing it.

orX From another main function: Press theh function button.The function button takes you directly tothe last active disc mode (CD Audio , DVDAudio , MP3 CD, Media Interface or DVDVideo). COMAND accesses all discs in theDVD changer.If you previously selected DVD Video mode,it will now be switched on.If you have another disc mode activated:

X Select Media.The media list appears.

X Select a DVD Video (Y page 159).

Via COMAND ControllerX Select Video from the main function line.

Displaying/Hiding Control Menu X To show:Slide qmr.

X To hide: Slide qmr.orX Wait approximately eight seconds.

Control menu displayed1 Disc type2 Current title3 Current scene4 Elapsed title time5 Display menu system

Displaying/Hiding Menu System X To show: Press n.orX When the control menu is shown, selectMenu.

X To hide: Slide qm and select Full screen.

158 DVD VideoVi

deo

Page 161: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Menu system displayed1 DVD Video menu2 Pause function3 Stop function4 Media selection5 Sound settings

Fast Forward or Rewind X Slide and hold omp in Full Screen mode

until the desired position is reached.orX Press and hold E or F in the control

panel until the desired position has beenreached.You see the control menu.

Selecting DVD Media X In DVD video mode, if necessary display the

menu system (Y page 158).X Select Media.

The media list appears. The R dotindicates the current medium being played.

Media list1 Symbol for DVD Video2 DVD Video currently playing

X To select video ý: Rotate ymz or slideqmr.

X To confirm your selection: Press n.COMAND changes the medium.

i If you select a CD, an DVD Audio or anMP3 medium, you switch to the audio modein question. You can find furtherinformation about the media list on(Y page 141).

Stop Function X In DVD Video mode, display the menu

system if necessary (Y page 158).X To interrupt playback: Select ±.

The display « changes to X.X To resume playback: Select X.

Playback continues from the point where itwas interrupted. The menu system ishidden.

X To stop playback: Select ± again whileplayback is interrupted.

orX Select ± twice during playback.

Selection is at X.X To restart playback: Select X.

Playback restarts from the beginning. Themenu system is hidden.

DVD Video 159

Vide

o

Z

Page 162: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Pause Function X In DVD Video mode, display the menu

system if necessary (Y page 158).X To pause playback: Select «.

The display « changes to X.X To resume playback: Select X.

Playback continues from the point where itwas paused. The menu system is hidden.

Selecting a Scene/Chapter X To skip forwards or backwards: Rotateymz or slide omp in Full Screen mode.or

X Press the E or F button on thecontrol panel.The control menu (Y page 158) appears forapproximately 8 seconds.

Selecting a Film/Track i This function is only available if the DVD

is divided into several films/tracks.

X Display the menu system if necessary(Y page 158).

X Select DVD-Video£DVD Functions.A menu appears.

DVD function menu

X Turn ymz or slide qmr until Title Selection is selected.

X To call up the selection list: Press n.X Select a film/track.

Picture Settings

Adjusting the Brightness, Contrast or ColorX Display the menu system if necessary

(Y page 158).X Select DVD-Video £ Brightness,Contrast or Color.

X To change the setting: Rotate ymz orslide qmr until the desired setting isreached.

X To save the setting: Press n.

Changing the Picture Format X Display the menu system if necessary

(Y page 158).X Select DVD-Video.

The DVD-Video menu appears. The filled-inoption button in front of one of these menuitems: 16:9 Optimized, 4:3 orWidescreen indicates the format currentlyselected.

X To change the format: Rotate ymz orslide qmr until the desired format isselected.

X To save the setting: Press n.

DVD Menu i The DVD menu is the menu stored on the

DVD itself. It is structured in various waysaccording to the individual DVD andpermits certain actions and settings.

160 DVD VideoVi

deo

Page 163: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Opening the DVD MenuX In DVD Video mode, if necessary, display

the menu system (Y page 158).X Select DVD-Video£DVD Functions£Menu.The DVD menu appears.

Selecting Menu Items in the DVD MenuX Slide qmr or omp.X To confirm your selection: Press n.

The selection menu appears.

i Menu items which cannot be selected aregreyed out.

X To confirm selection: Select Select.COMAND will perform the action ordisplays a submenu represented by themenu item selected in the DVD menu. Ifnecessary select from further options in thesame way.COMAND then switches back to the DVDmenu.

i Depending on the DVD, it is possible themenu item Play either has no function orno function in certain parts of the DVDmenu. This is indicated by the 7 symbolon the display.

orX In DVD Video mode, if necessary, display

the control menu (Y page 158).X Select Menu£DVD Video£DVD Functions

DVD menu

Stopping Film or Skipping to the Beginning or End of a Scene X Select any menu item from the DVD menu.

The selection menu appears.X To stop a film: Select Stop from the menu.X To skip to the end of a scene: SelectÔ from the menu.

X To skip to the beginning of a scene:Select Ó from the menu.

i Depending on the DVD, the Ó andÔ menu items may not function at all ormay not function at certain points in theDVD menu. You will see the 7 symbol inthe display as an indicator.

Moving up one Level in the DVD MenuX Press the k button.

orX Select the corresponding menu item in the

DVD menu.or

X Select any menu item from the DVD menu.X Select Go Up from the selection menu.

i Depending on the DVD, the Play menuitem may not function at all or may notfunction at certain points in the DVD menu.You will see the 7 symbol in the displayas an indicator.

DVD Video 161

Vide

o

Z

Page 164: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Back to the MovieX Press the k button repeatedly until you

see the film.or

X Select the corresponding menu item in theDVD menu.

X Select the Back (to movie) menu itemfrom the selection menu.

i Depending on the DVD, the Back (to movie) menu item may not function ingeneral or may not function at certainpoints in the DVD menu.

Setting the Language and Audio Format

i This function is not available on all DVDs.Where available, you can set the DVD menulanguage and the audio language or audioformat. The number of possible settings isdependent on the DVD content. It ispossible that the settings may also beaccessed in the DVD menu (Y page 160).

X Display the menu system if necessary(Y page 158).

X Select DVD-Video£DVD Functions.X Select Menu Language or Audio Language.Both of these will bring up a selection menuafter a few seconds. The R dot in front ofan entry indicates the currently selectedlanguage.

X To change the setting: Rotate ymz orslide qmr until the desired setting isreached.

X To save the setting: Press n.

Subtitles and Camera Angle i These functions are not available on all

DVDs. The number of subtitle languagesand camera angles available depends on

the content of the DVD. The settings mayalso be accessed in the DVD menu(Y page 160).

X Display the menu system if necessary(Y page 158).

X Select DVD-Video £ DVD Functions.X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle.

Both of these will bring up a selectionmenu. The R dot in front of an entryindicates the current setting.

X To change the setting: Rotate ymz orslide qmr until the desired setting isreached.

X To save the setting: Press n.

Interactive Content DVDs may have interactive content (e.g. avideo game).In a video game, for example, you can controlthe play by selecting or triggering actions. Thetype and number of actions is dependent onthe DVD.X To select an action: Slide qmr or omp.X To trigger an action: Press n.

A menu appears and the first entry,Select, is highlighted.

X Press n.orX In DVD Video mode, if necessary display

the control menu (Y page 158).X Select Menu£DVD-Video£DVD Functions.

X Select a directional arrow to select ortrigger an action.

162 DVD VideoVi

deo

Page 165: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

The way you can control the actions dependson the DVD.

Video Aux

Aux ConnectorsAn external video source (Video Aux) can beconnected to COMAND via Media Interface(Y page 147)1/8 inch audio/video jacklocated inside the glovebox.

i In vehicles equipped with a rear viewcamera, the Video Aux connection cannotbe used for external video sources.

Switching to Video Aux

From Another Main FunctionX Select Video£Video£Video Auxi If Video Aux mode was active last, you

only need to select Video.

Within the Video FunctionX Select Video£Video Aux

The Video Aux menu appears. The mediumin the external video source is played,provided it is connected and switched toplayback.

i Please refer to the relevant operatingguide for operation of the external videosource.

Video Aux SettingsThe following settings can be made in VideoAux mode:RVolume (Y page 35)RBalance and fader (Y page 35)RTreble and bass (Y page 35)RSurround sound (Y page 36)RPicture (Y page 160)

G WarningDue to the different volumes of the externalaudio sources, system messages (e.g.navigation announcements) may be muchlouder. You may need to disable these systemmessages or adjust the volume of thesemessages manually.

i The volume of external audio sources isextremely variable. It is possible that adevice connected as an external audiosource will sound quieter or louder in thevehicle or that the usual maximum volumecannot be achieved. On certain devices thevolume can be set separately. In this case,start at a moderate volume and increase itslowly. In this way, you can determinewhether the system is capable of playbackwithout distortion, even at a high volume.

Video Aux 163

Vide

o

Z

Page 166: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

164

Page 167: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

General Information ......................... 166Basic Functions ................................. 170System Settings ................................ 172CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation . 173DVD Video Operation ........................ 177Aux Operation ................................... 181

165

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Page 168: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

General Information

Vehicle Equipmenti This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

OverviewThis chapter describes the RSE (Rear SeatEntertainment) system:RBasic functions (Y page 170)RSystem settings (Y page 172)RCD/DVD audio and MP3 operation

(Y page 173)RDVD Video operation (Y page 177)RAux operation (Y page 181)

Safety Instructions

G WarningThe RSE CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laserproduct. There is a danger of invisible laserradiation when you open or damage the cover.Do not remove the cover. The RSE CD/DVDplayer does not contain any parts which canbe serviced by the user. For safety reasons,have any necessary service work performedby qualified personnel.

G WarningThe driver should not wear a Rear SeatEntertainment headset while operating the

vehicle under any circumstances. The use ofa headset while driving the vehicle coulddrastically impair the ability to react to audibletraffic conditions (e.g. emergency sirens frompolice/fire/ambulance, another car’s horn,etc.).

G WarningWhen not in use, headsets or external videosources should be stored in a safe location(e.g. one of the vehicle’s storagecompartments) so that they are not loosewithin the passenger compartment duringbraking, vehicle maneuvers or a trafficaccident. Objects moving within thepassenger compartment could cause seriouspersonal injury to vehicle occupants.

G WarningDue to a potential choking hazard, wiredheadset usage by children should only occurwith adult supervision.

Rear Seat Entertainment Components

The rear-seat entertainment system consistsof:Rtwo display screens behind the head rests

of front-seatsRremote control(s)Ra CD/DVD driveRAux connectors on the drive and display

screens for connecting external devicesRtwo headsets (wireless headsets only

available in the US)

166 General InformationRe

ar S

eat E

nter

tain

men

t

Page 169: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Display Screens

: Connector for wired headset; Aux connectors

= Display? Infra-red sensors

Remote Control

: Switching the display screen on or off; Switching on/off the key illumination= Selecting the display screen (left/right)

? Selecting menu item or menu (arrows)A Confirming selection (OK)B Muting the playbackC Setting the Volume (wired headset)D Skipping tracks forward/backwardE Selecting a title directlyF Leaving a menu

Selecting the Active Display Screen for the Remote Control With the remote control you can select whichof the two display screens is responsive to theremote control.X Selecting the left/right display screen:

Rotate the wheel = until L or R appears inthe small window.

Switching On/Off the Display Screeni If the ignition key is in position 0 or 1 (Y

vehicle operating guide) or the key is notinserted, the display screens are switchedoff automatically after 30 minutes. Beforeswitching off a corresponding messageappears.You can switch on the screen(s) again butbe aware it will continue to discharge thevehicle battery.

General Information 167

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Z

Page 170: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

X Point the remote control to the activescreen and press the On/Off : button onthe remote control.The display screen is switched on or off.

i Switching on with the remote control isonly possible if the ignition is on.

Muting the Audio Playback (Only Wired Headset) X Press the button B on the remote control.

Depending on the previous state the soundis switched on or off.

Selecting a Menu Item and Confirming the SelectionX Selecting the menu item: Press the arrow

buttons ? on the remote control.X Confirming the selection: Press the OK

button A.

CD/DVD Drive and Aux Connectors The CD/DVD drive is located inRcentral position underneath the rear seats

in vehicles with folding rear seatRin the arm rest between the rear seats in

vehicles without folding rear seat

: CD/DVD slot; Aux, right (R) connector for audio signal= Aux, left (L) connector for audio signal? Aux, connector for video signal (V)A CD/DVD eject button

The Aux connectors shown here representthe source Disk Drive Aux. The sameconnectors are available at the displayscreens. These represent the Aux sourceDisplay Aux .

Wireless Headsets i Vehicles sold in the US are equipped with

wireless headsets. Vehicles sold in Canadaand elsewhere are equipped with wiredheadsets.

: Setting the volume; Selecting the display screen= Battery compartment? Switching headset on/offA State Indicator LED

X Adapt the fit of the headset by pulling theheadset clamp as indicated by the arrowsin the figure above.

168 General InformationRe

ar S

eat E

nter

tain

men

t

Page 171: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Switching ON/Off the Wireless headsetX Press button ?.

Depending on the previous state theheadset is switched on or off. In order topreserve battery charge, the headset isswitched off if there is no IR signalreception for appr. 3 minutes.

Setting the Wireless Headset Volume X Turn the Thumb wheel : to set the desired

volume.

i If you have connected a wired headset toa display screen, you can set the volumewith the Volume +/- button C of theremote control (Y page 167).

Selecting the Display Screen for the Headset X Select the display screen with the

switch ;.The selected screen L or R is indicated.

State Indicator LEDThe color of the LED indicates:Rif the headset is switched on or offRthe battery condition

Color State

Green Headset is switched on andthe batteries are full.

Dark Headset is switched off orthe batteries are empty ornot inserted.

Red Headset is switched on andthe batteries are almostempty.

Connecting Additional HeadsetsYou can connect wired headsets to both ofthe display screens. The socket is suitable forheadsets with 1/8“ stereo jacks and 32 Ohmimpedance (Y page 167).

Rear Compartment Socket In vehicles with the rear-seat entertainmentsystem, there is a 12 V socket in the rearcompartment. Please refer to the vehicleOperator's Manual for the exact location ofthe socket.The socket can be used for accessories witha maximum power consumption of 180 W.

Replacing the Batteries You need batteries for the remote control andthe wireless headset.

G WarningKeep batteries out of the reach of children.Immediately seek medical help if a childswallows a battery. Batteries are not to beshort-circuited, dismantled or thrown intofire.

H Environmental NoteBatteries contain materials that can harm theenvironment if disposed of improperly.Recycling of batteries is the preferred methodof disposal. Many states require sellers ofbatteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

General Information 169

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Z

Page 172: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Remote Control Batteries

The remote control contains two batteries ofsize AAA, 1.5 V.X Remove the cover of the battery

compartment 3 on the back of the remotecontrol by pressing down the clip :.

X Take out the empty batteries 5.X Insert the new batteries. Mind the polarity

marks on the batteries.Battery on the left:The plus terminal (+) must face upwards.Battery on the right:The plus terminal (+) must face downwards.

X Put the cover with the engagementhooks ? first onto the batterycompartment and let the snap-fit hook 2snap in.

Wireless Headset Batteries The battery compartment cover is located onthe left headphone.

1 Battery compartment coverThe wireless headset contains two batteriesof size AAA, 1.5 V.X Open battery compartment cover : by

folding it up. When doing so, hold the leftheadphone as shown in the illustration toprevent the inserted batteries from fallingout.

X Take out the empty batteries.X Insert the new batteries. Mind the polarity

marks on the batteries.Battery on the left:The plus terminal (+) must face upwards.Battery on the right:The plus terminal (+) must face downwards.

X Close the battery compartment.The state indicator LED lights green whenyou switch on the headset and the batterieswere inserted correctly.

Basic Functions

The following operating modes are availablefor the rear-seat entertainment system:RCD/DVD Audio and MP3 mode CD/DVD

Audio and MP3 operation (Y page 173)RDVD Video operation (Y page 177)RAUX mode

170 Basic FunctionsRe

ar S

eat E

nter

tain

men

t

Page 173: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

In Aux mode you can play external videosources that are connected either to thedisplay screens or to the CD/DVD drive. Inaddition you can play the active audio orvideo source of COMAND (Y page 181).

With the system settings menu you can setdisplay design and language for each screenseparately (Y page 172).

Wireless Headset Operation i Vehicles sold in the US are equipped with

wireless headsets. Vehicles sold in Canadaand elsewhere are equipped with wiredheadsets.

You can use the wireless headset and/or twowired headsets connected to the displayscreens (Y page 168).X Switch on the wireless headset

(Y page 169).X Set the volume of the headset

(Y page 169).X Select the display screen for the headset

(Y page 169).

Main Loudspeaker Operationi This function is available in connection

with COMAND.The sound of a medium which is played in theRSE disc drive can also be heard over thevehicle loudspeakers. For this, at least on oneof the display screens the operating modeDisc has to be active.X Switching to Audio menu: Select Audio£ Audio in COMAND.

X Select Rear.The volume control of the headsets has noimpact on the volume of the loudspeakers.

Setting Treble and Bass X Switch to the menu of the respective

operating modeRCD Audio (Y page 174)RDVD Audio (Y page 174)RMP3 (Y page 174)RDVD Video (Y page 177)RAux (Y page 182)

X Select Treble or Bass.A setting scale appears.

X To change the value: Press the n orý button on the remote control.

X To confirm the setting: Press the 9button on the remote control.

Multiuser Operation The two display screens can be operatedalmost entirely independent from each other.For some menus, however, there can ariseconflicts if the two display screens are usedsimultaneously.

Simultaneous Use of the Rear-Compartment Disc DriveIf on both display screens the disc drive isused, the selection of certain settings on onescreen will have an impact on the otherscreen as well.The following functions affect both screens:RChanging the playback optionsRSelecting a track (from track list or folder)RUsing the Play, Stop or Pause function.RUsing the fast forward/rewind functionRSwitching to DVD menu and and navigating

through itRSetting language, subtitle and camera

angleRCalling up interactive DVD content

Basic Functions 171

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Z

Page 174: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

The following functions affect only onescreen:RChanging Audio, Video or screen settingsRSwitching between full screen and menu

system.

Switching Operating ModesWhen you leave an operation mode, e.g. CDAudio, its current settings are stored. If youcall up this operation mode later, there aretwo possibilities:RThe operation mode settings have been

changed on the other display screen.RThe operation mode settings have not been

changed.In the first case the operation mode settingswill be as they are on the other display screen.In the second case the settings remain asthey were before you left the operation mode.

Functional Restrictions in DVD Video Mode

Some functions may temporarily orpermanently not be available. If you use suchfunctions, you will see the symbol 7.

System Settings

All system settings can be set for each displayscreen independently.

Calling up the System MenuX Select System in the main function line.

The system menu appears on the selecteddisplay screen.

Selecting the Display Language X Select System Settings £ Language.

The list of languages appears. A R dotindicates the current setting.

X To change the setting: Select anotherlanguage with the button n or ý onthe remote control.

X Press the 9 button.The rear-seat entertainment systemactivates the selected language.

Switching the Display Design X Select System settings.X Select Day Mode, Night Mode orAutomatic.The ä icon indicates the current setting.

X Use the n or ý button to select asetting.RDay Mode

The display remains set to day design.RNight Mode

The display remains set to night design.RAutomatic

The display automatically switchesdepending on the instrument clusterlighting.

X Press the 9 button on the remote control.

172 System SettingsRe

ar S

eat E

nter

tain

men

t

Page 175: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Adjusting the Brightness X Select System settings £Brightness.A scale appears.

X To set the brightness: Press the n orý button.The brightness bar moves up or down. Theimage dims or brightens according to thebar position on the scale.

X To confirm the setting: Press the 9button on the remote control.

Switching the Display Screen On/ Off

Switching Off the DisplayX Select Display off from the system

menu.

Switching On the DisplayX Press the 9 button on the remote control.

CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation

Safety Instructions

G WarningThe RSE CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laserproduct. There is a danger of invisible laserradiation when you open or damage the cover.Do not remove the cover. The RSE CD/DVDplayer does not contain any parts which canbe serviced by the user. For safety reasons,have any necessary service work performedby qualified personnel.

Notes on CDs/DVDsPlease refer to the chapter ”Audio” forgeneral information about CD/DVD discs andon the MP3 format (Y page 133) and(Y page 132).

Inserting a Disc The CD/DVD drive is located inRcentral position underneath the rear seats

in vehicles with folding rear seatRin the arm rest between the rear seats in

vehicles without folding rear seat

1 CD/DVD slot2 Eject buttonThe drive takes one medium at a time. If thereis already a medium loaded, you must firsteject it.X Insert a disc into the slot with the printed

side upwards.If the medium has no printed side, the sideyou want to play has to face downwards.The drive pulls the disc in.

The CD/DVD drive plays the discRif it has been inserted properly andRafter you have switched to disc operation

(Y page 174).The data of a MP3 disc must be first loadedfrom the drive. This takes some timedepending on the number of folders and files.

CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation 173

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Z

Page 176: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Ejecting a Disc X Press Eject button 8.

The drive ejects the disc.X Take the disc out of the slot.

If you do not take the disc out of the slot,the drive will pull it in again automaticallyafter a short while.

Switching to CD Audio, DVD Audio or MP3 Operation X Insert a disc (Y page 173).X Select Disc in the main function line using

the remote control.The corresponding mode is activated. Therear-seat entertainment system plays thedisc.

Example Display of CD Audio Operation

1 Disc type _2 Track number3 Track name (only if stored on the disc as

CD text)4 Elapsed track time5 Visual time and track display6 Current playback settings (no icon for

“Normal track sequence”)7 Bass setting8 Treble setting9 Disc name (only if stored on the disc as

CD text)a Track listb Playback options

Example Display of DVD Audio Operation

1 Disc type ü2 Track number3 Track name4 Elapsed track time5 Visual time and track display6 Current playback option (no icon for

“Normal track sequence”)7 Bass setting8 Treble setting9 Disc name (if available)a Track listb Stop functionH Pause functionI Playback options

Example Display of MP3 Operation

1 Disc type þ2 Track number3 Track name4 Elapsed track time

174 CD/DVD Audio and MP3 OperationRe

ar S

eat E

nter

tain

men

t

Page 177: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

5 Visual time and track display6 Current playback option (no icon for

"Normal track sequence")7 Bass setting8 Treble setting9 Current folder or medium namea Folder listb Playback options

i For MP3 titles with variable bitrate thedisplay of the elapsed track time may notbe correct.

Selecting a Track

Selecting by Skipping to a TrackX To skip forwards or back to a track:

Press . or , on the remote control.orX Press E or F button on the remote

control.‘Forward track skip’ skips to the next track.‘Backward track skip’ skips to thebeginning of the current track, if the trackhas been playing for more than 8 seconds.If the track has been playing for less than8 seconds, it will skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

Selecting via Track ListX In CD Audio/DVD Audio mode: SelectTrack list.

orX In MP3 mode: Press the 9 button when

the main area is highlighted.The track list appears. The R dot indicatesthe current track.

X To select a track: Press n or ý onthe remote control.

X Press 9 on the remote control.

Selecting a Track by Directly Entering its NumberX Press button h.

The track entry display appears.Example: track 2X Press the number button 2.Example: track 12X Press the corresponding number keys in

rapid succession.

i It is not possible to enter numbers thatexceed the number of tracks on the CD orin the currently active folder.

X Wait for approximately 3 seconds aftermaking an entry.You will hear the entered track. Thecorresponding basic menu then reappears.

Fast Forward/Rewind X Main area is active: Press and hold

the . or , button on the remotecontrol until you have reached the desiredposition.

orX Press and hold the E or F on the

remote control until you have reached thedesired position.

Selecting a Folder i This function is only available in MP3

mode.

X Select Folder in MP3 mode.orX Press the 9 button when the main area is

highlighted.The content of the folder is displayed.

CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation 175

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Z

Page 178: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

1 Back folder symbol2 Current folder name3 Track icon

X To switch to the next folder up: Selecticon U.The display shows the next folder up.

1 Back folder symbol2 Folder symbol

X To select a folder: Select the desiredfolder.You will see the tracks in the folder.

X To select a track: Press n or ý onthe remote control.

X Press 9 on the remote control.The track is played and the correspondingfolder is now the active folder.

Pause function i This function is only available in DVD

Audio mode.

X To pause playback: Select «.The display « changes to X.

X To resume playback: Select X.The display X changes to «.

Stop function i This function is only available in DVD

Audio mode.

X To interrupt playback: Select ±.The playback stops and jumps to thebeginning of the DVD.

X To resume playback: Select X.The playback continues from the positionwhere it was stopped.

Setting the Audio Format It is only possible to set the audio format inDVD Audio mode. The number of availableaudio formats is dependent on the DVD. Thecontent of an Audio DVD is called the ‘album’,which can be divided into a maximum of ninegroups. A group may contain, for example,music of different sound qualities (stereo andmulti-channel formats) or bonus tracks. Eachgroup can include up to 99 tracks. If an AudioDVD only comprises one audio format, the“Group” menu item(s) cannot be selected.X Select DVD-A £Group.

The list of available audio formats appears.The R dot indicates the format currentlyselected.

X To change a setting: Press n or ýon the remote control.

X Press 9 on the remote control.X To exit the menu: Press . or , on

the remote control.

Playback options The following options are available:

176 CD/DVD Audio and MP3 OperationRe

ar S

eat E

nter

tain

men

t

Page 179: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RNormal Track SequenceYou will hear the tracks in the normalsequence (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).RRandom Tracks:

You will hear the tracks in random order(e.g. track 3, 8, 5, etc.).RRandom Folder (MP3 mode only)

The tracks in the currently active folder andany subfolders are heard in random order.

X To select an option: Switch to CD or DVD-A or MP3 mode (Y page 174).

X Select CD or DVD-A or MP3.The option list appears. A R dot indicatesthe option currently selected.

X Select an option.The option is switched on. All optionsexcept Normal Track Sequence will beindicated in the main area.

i If you change the disc, the Normal Track Sequence option is activatedautomatically. If an option is selected, itremains selected after the rear-seatentertainment system is switched on or off.

Switching Track Information On/Off (MP3 Mode Only)

If this function is switched on, folder and tracknames are displayed.If this function is switched off, disc and filename are displayed.X Select Display Track Information.

The function is switched on Ç or offc depending on the previous status.

DVD Video Operation

Please refer to the chapter “Audio” forgeneral information about CD/DVD discs(Y page 133) and on the MP3 format(Y page 132).

For Safety Instructions refer to section “CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation”(Y page 131).For special notes on DVDs and DVD playbackconditions refer to chapter “Video”(Y page 158).

Functional RestrictionsDepending on the DVD, it is possible thatcertain functions or actions described in thissection will be temporarily blocked or may notfunction at all. As soon as you try to activatethese functions or actions, you will see icon7 in the display.

Loading and Ejecting DVDsX Proceed as described in the "CD/DVD

Audio and MP3 mode" section(Y page 173).

Switching to DVD modeX Load a DVD Video disc.

The rear-seat entertainment system loadsthe inserted disc.The DVD is played according to the playback options:Either the film is started automatically orthe DVD menu appears that is stored on thedisc. In the latter case you must start thefilm manually.

X Select Disc using the remote control.DVD mode is activated.The Video DVD meets the playback criteria: Either the film is startedautomatically or the DVD menu appearsthat is stored on the disc. In the latter caseyou must start the film manually.

X To do so, select the corresponding menuitem in the DVD menu (Y page 180).

i If Disc operation was selected last, thedisc is played automatically after loading.

DVD Video Operation 177

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Z

Page 180: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Hiding or Showing the Control Menu X To display: Press n or ý on the

remote control.X To hide: Press n or ý on the remote

control.orX Wait for approximately 8 seconds.

Control menu1 Disc type2 Current track3 Current scene4 Elapsed track time5 Displays menu system

Displaying/Hiding Menu SystemX To display: Press the 9 button.orX When the control menu is shown, selectMenu.

Menu system1 DVD-Video menu2 Pause function3 Stop function4 Treble setting5 Bass setting

X To hide: Press n on the remote controland select Full Screen.

Fast Forward/Rewind X Press and hold the E or F button

until the desired position has beenreached.You see the control menu.

Stop Function X Display the menu system if necessary

(Y page 178).X To interrupt playback: Select ±.

The playback stops.X To resume playback: Select X.

Pause Function X Display the menu system if necessary

(Y page 178).X To pause playback: Select «.

The display « changes to X.

X To resume playback: Select X.The menu system is hidden.

178 DVD Video OperationRe

ar S

eat E

nter

tain

men

t

Page 181: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Selecting a Scene/Chapter If the film is subdivided into scenes orchapters, you can select the scenes orchapters step by step while the film isrunning. Some DVDs do not allow this incertain sections (e.g. in the introduction).X To skip forwards or back: Press .

or , on the remote control.orX Press the E or F button.

The control menu (Y page 178) appears forapproximately 8 seconds.

Selecting a scene/chapter directlyExample: scene/chapter 5X Press the h button while the movie is

running.X Press number button 5.orX Display the menu system if necessary

(Y page 178).X Select DVD-V £ DVD Functions.X Select Scene selection in the menu.X Use the . or , button to select

number 5.In both cases playback will begin after ashort while with scene/chapter 5.

i Scene/chapter selection may also bepossible from the DVD menu stored on theDVD itself.

Selecting a Film/Track If the DVD contains several films, these canbe selected directly. Film selection is possibleboth while the DVD is stopped and while it isplaying.X Display the menu system if necessary

(Y page 178).X Select DVD-V £ DVD Functions.

X Select Title Selection in the menu.X To call up the selection list: Press the9 button.

X Select a film/track.

Selecting a Film/Track DirectlyExample: selecting film 2X Press number button 2.

After a short while, film 2 begins.

i Film selection may also be possible fromthe DVD menu on the DVD itself.

Picture Settings

Adjusting the Brightness, Contrast or Color X Display the menu system if necessary

(Y page 178).X Select DVD-V £ Brightness orContrast or Colour.

X To change setting: Press n or ýuntil the desired setting has been attained.

X To store a setting: Press the 9 button.

Switching Picture Format X Display the menu system if necessary

(Y page 178).X Select DVD-V.

The DVD-V menu appears. The ä icon infront of one of these menu items: 16:9

DVD Video Operation 179

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Z

Page 182: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

optimized, 4:3 or Wide Screen indicatesthe currently selected format.

X To switch formats: Press n or ýuntil the desired format is selected.

X To save setting: Press 9.

DVD Menu The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVDitself. It is structured in various waysaccording to the individual DVD and permitscertain actions and settings.

i For multilingual DVDs, you can switchbetween languages in the DVD menu, forexample.

Opening the DVD MenuX Display the menu system if necessary

(Y page 178).X Select DVD-V £ DVD Functions £Menu.The DVD menu appears.

Selecting Menu Items from the DVD MenuX Press n, ý, . or , on the

remote control.X To confirm your selection: Press 9.

The selection menu appears.

i Menu items which cannot be selected aregrayed out.

DVD menu

X Confirm Select.COMAND will perform the action ordisplays a submenu represented by themenu item selected in the DVD menu. Ifnecessary select from further options in thesame way.

X Make a selection from the further options,if necessary.The rear-seat entertainment system thenswitches back to the DVD menu.

i Depending on the DVD, the Go up menuitem may not function at all or may notfunction at certain points in the DVD menu.You will see the 7 icon in the display asan indicator.

Stopping Film or Skipping to the Beginning/End of a SceneX Select any menu item from the DVD menu.

The selection menu appears.X To stop a film: Select Stop from the menu.X To skip to the end of a scene: SelectÔ from the menu.

X To skip to the beginning of a scene:Select Ó from the menu.

i Depending on the DVD, the Ó andÔ menu items may not function at all ormay not function at certain points in theDVD menu. You will see the 7 icon in thedisplay as an indicator.

Switching to the next DVD Menu upX Press % on the remote control.orX Select the corresponding menu item in the

DVD menu.orX Select any menu item from the DVD menu.X Select Go up from the menu.

i Depending on the DVD, the Go up menuitem may not function at all or may notfunction at certain points in the DVD menu.

180 DVD Video OperationRe

ar S

eat E

nter

tain

men

t

Page 183: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

You will see the 7 icon in the display asan indicator.

Back to MovieX Press % on the remote control

repeatedly until you see the film.orX Select the corresponding menu item in the

DVD menu.orX Select any menu item from the DVD menu.X Select the Back (To the Movie) menu

item from the selection menu.

i Depending on the DVD, the Back (To the Movie) menu item may not functionin general or may not function at certainpoints in the DVD menu. You will see the7 icon in the display as an indicator.

Setting the Language i This function is not available on all DVDs.

If it is available, you can set the audiolanguage or the audio format. The numberof settings is determined by the DVDcontent. The settings may also beaccessible in the DVD menu (Y page 180).

X Display the menu system if necessary(Y page 178).

X Select DVD-V £ DVD Functions.X Select Audio Language.

A selection menu appears after a shortwhile. The R dot in front of an entryindicates the currently selected language.

X To change a setting: Press n or ýuntil the desired setting has been reached.

X To save setting: Press 9.X To exit the menu without changes:

Press . or ,.

Subtitles and Camera Angle i These functions are not available on all

DVDs. The number of subtitle languagesand camera angles available depends onthe content of the DVD. The settings mayalso be accessible in the DVD menu.

X Display the menu system if necessary(Y page 178).

X Select DVD-V £ DVD functions.X Select Subtitles or Camera angle.

Both of these will call up a selection menuafter a few seconds. The R dot in front ofan entry indicates the current setting.

X To change a setting: Press n or ýuntil the desired setting has been attained.

X To save setting: Press 9.X To exit the menu without changes:

Press . or ,.

Interactive content DVDs can also contain interactive content(e.g. a video game). In a video game, you maybe able to influence events by selecting andtriggering actions. The type and number ofactions depend on the DVD.X To select an action: Press n,ý, . or , on the remote control.

X To trigger an action: Press 9 on theremote control.A menu appears and the first entry,Select, is highlighted.

X Press 9 on the remote control.

Aux Operation

i You can connect two external videosources to the display screens (DisplayAux) and additionally one video source tothe DVD drive (Drive Aux).

Aux Operation 181

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Z

Page 184: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

For further information on external videosources please refer to the operating guideof the device.

Connecting an Aux Source

Drive AuxThe Aux connectors of the drive are besidethe Eject button on the front panel of the DVDdrive (Y page 168).

Display AuxThe display Aux jacks are located on the sideof the screen (Y page 167).

Connecting an Audio or Video SourceX Insert the audio jacks for the left and the

right signal into the respective connectorslabeled L and R.

X Insert the video jack (yellow) into theconnector with the V label.

Switching to AUX Mode

Disc Drive AuxX Select Aux.

The Aux menu appears.

Aux menu

X Select Source £ Drive Aux.The video source is played if it is connectedto the drive and in playback mode. If there

is no video picture available, an Audio menuappears.

i For operating the external video sourceplease refer to the operator’s guide of thedevice.

Display AuxX Select the display screen to which the

external source is connected.X Select Aux.X Select Source £ Display Aux.

The video source is played if it is connectedto the screen and in playback mode. If thereis no video picture available, an Audio menuappears.

Selecting an Active COMAND SourceX Select Aux.X Select Source £ COMAND.

The Audio or Video mode to whichCOMAND is set is played by the RSEsystem.

Operation with Active Source from COMAND

Audio or Video that is active in COMAND canalso be played back via the RSE system.X Switch to the desired Audio mode or

display the menu system in Video mode onCOMAND.

X Select the menu item on the left below, e.g.CD if COMAND is in CD mode.

X Select Active Aud./Vid. Source for the Rear.

182 Aux OperationRe

ar S

eat E

nter

tain

men

t

Page 185: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

In the status line you will see the headsetsymbol and the _ symbol indicating theactive mode.If you change the mode in COMAND, the newmode is also played back via the RSE system.The display changes accordingly.X To switch off the function in COMAND:

Switch to the desired audio mode inCOMAND or call up the menu system whenin video mode.

X Select the menu item on the left below, e.g.CD if CD mode is selected.

X Select Rear Audio/Video Off.

Setting the Brightness/Contrast/Color X In the AUX menu, select Display Aux orDrive Aux.

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color.A setting scale appears.

X To adjust setting: Press n or ý.X To confirm setting: Press 9.

Changing the Picture Format X In the AUX menu, select Display Aux orDrive Aux.The ä icon in front of one of these menuitems: 16:9 optimized, 4:3 or Wide Screen indicates the currently selectedformat.

X To switch formats: Press n or ýuntil the desired format is selected.

X To save setting: Press 9.

Aux Operation 183

Rear

Sea

t Ent

erta

inm

ent

Z

Page 186: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

184

Page 187: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Overview ............................................ 186Phone ................................................. 188Navigation ......................................... 191Address Book .................................... 197Radio and Satellite Radio ................. 201DVD Changer ..................................... 203External Equipment (Aux) ................ 205Command List ................................... 205Troubleshooting ................................ 211

185

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Page 188: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Overview

Operating Safety

G Warning!Please devote your attention first andforemost to the traffic situation you are in.While the system permits hands-free phoneoperation, attention to traffic may be divertednot only by physical operation of a phone, butalso by the distraction of a phoneconversation while driving. As such, for safetyreasons, we encourage the driver to stop thevehicle in a safe place before answering orplacing a phone call.For safety reasons, you should only select adestination when the vehicle is stationary.While the navigation system providesdirectional assistance, the driver must remainfocused on safe driving behavior, especiallypay attention to traffic and street signs, andshould utilize the system’s audio cues whiledriving.The navigation system does not supply anyinformation on stop signs, yield signs, trafficregulations or traffic safety rules. Theirobservance always remains in the driver’spersonal responsibility. DVD maps do notcover all areas nor all routes within an area.Traffic regulations always have priority overany route recommendations given.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

G WarningNavigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.Please always use this feature instead ofconsulting the map display for directions.Consulting the symbols or map display fordirections may cause you to divert yourattention from driving and increase your riskof an accident.

G Warning!Please do not use the Voice Control Systemin an emergency, as the tone of your voicemay change in a stressful situation. This couldcause a delay in completing your phone callin a timely manner. This could distract you inan emergency situation and cause you to beinvolved in an accident.

Vehicle Equipmenti This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

Symbols Only Used in this ChapterThe following symbols indicate:s that you have to say somethingt that there is a voice output from the

voice controlu that the system shows information on

the display.

Usage You can use the voice control system tooperate the following systems depending onthe equipment in your vehicle:RPhoneRNavigationRAddress bookRAudio (radio, satellite radio, DVD changer,

memory card, music register, mediainterface)

Say the commands without pausing betweenindividual words. If you enter a command thatdoes not exist or is incorrect, the voicecontrol system asks you for a new commandwith Please repeat or Please repeat

186 OverviewVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 189: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

your entry!. The voice control confirmsimportant commands to you and gives youinstructions in the event of incorrect entries.

Command Types Voice control distinguishes between thefollowing types of command:RGlobal commands:

These are commands which can be calledup at any time (e.g. help, navigation orphone commands).RLocal commands:

These are commands which are onlyavailable for the active application (e.g.“Save”).

Active ApplicationThe local commands refer to the applicationcurrently shown on the display and to theaudio source you are currently listening to.For example, if you are listening to the radiowhile the navigation application is active onthe display, you can operate bothapplications using voice control.

Operating Voice Control

1 Multifunction display2 x Mute, X decreases the volume,

W increases the volume3 ? Activates voice control? % Cancels voice control

Starting the Dialog X Switch on the ignition (see the vehicle

Operator's Manual).

i After the ignition has been switched on, ittakes about 30 seconds for the voicecontrol system to be ready for operation.During this period the message Loading Speech Data is displayed.

X Press the ? button.An acoustic signal confirms that the dialoghas been started.

X Give a command.

Interrupting the Dialog If a list appears on the display, you can usethe “Pause” command to interrupt the dialog.You can then select an entry using theCOMAND controller.

Overview 187

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 190: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

To resume the dialog with voice control, pressthe ? button on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Canceling the Dialog X Press the % button.orX Say the command Cancel (except when

creating and storing voice tags, navigationentries or during individualization).

orX Press any button on COMAND.

Adjusting the Volume X Start the dialog.X Give a command, e.g. Help.X Press the W or X button.

The volume increases or decreases duringvoice output.

orX Set the volume for the voice output on the

volume control for COMAND.

Display Messages The audible help function can besupplemented by visual help on the display(Y page 42). If the help function is switchedon, the most important commands that arecurrently possible appear in the display whenyou start the dialog.In the address book and navigation system, aselection list is shown in the display if voicecontrol requires additional information fromyou.

Entering Numbers RDigits from “zero” to “nine” are permitted.RSay the phone number in groups of three

to five digits.

Spell RThe letters of the alphabet and the numbers

0 to 9 are permitted.RSay the letters in groups of five to seven

letters.RSay each individual letter clearly.

i Using individualization, you can fine-tunevoice control to your own voice and thusimprove voice recognition. The process ofindividualization is described in chapter“System Settings” (Y page 42).

i If you use individualization, it may impairrecognition of other users. Switch offindividualization if it makes recognition ofother users worse.

Phone

G WarningSome jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a cellular telephone while driving.Whether or not prohibited by law, for safetyreasons, the driver should not use the cellulartelephone while the vehicle is in motion. Stopthe vehicle in a safe location before placing oranswering a call.If you nonetheless choose to use the mobilephone while driving, please use the handsfreefeature and be sure to pay attention to thetraffic situation at all times. Use the mobilephone only when road, weather and trafficconditions permit. Otherwise, you may not beable to observe traffic conditions and couldendanger yourself and others.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

188 PhoneVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 191: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

OperationYou can use voice control to:Rplace a call by using your voice to input a

phone numberRstore names and numbers in the address

bookRdial a number from the address bookRdial a number from the received calls or

latest calls listRlisten to the phone bookRretrieve and manage your voice mail and

recorded announcement servicesRredialVoice control recognizes whether:Ryour phone is switched onRyour phone is connected via Bluetooth®

Rthe car phone is registered with therelevant mobile phone networkRit is possible to dialIf it is not possible to dial, voice control issuesa message to this effect.

i You can still operate your phone using thekeypad.

Commands

“Phone”Use the “Phone” command to select thephone application. Use this command if youwish the digits entered to be shown on thedisplay.

“Help Phone”Voice control has an extensive help function.Using the “Help Phone” command, you canhave all the essential commands for thephone read out (Y page 206).

“Dial number”You can use the “Dial number” command todial a phone number.The digits 0 to 9 and the word “Plus” arepermitted.“Plus” replaces the international dialing code,e.g. “00”.Say the phone number in the form of acontinuous string of digits or as blocks ofdigits, e.g. three to five digits.Voice control repeats the digits it recognizesafter each block of digits (with a pause ofabout half a second between each block ofdigits) and waits for you to continue speaking.Example of dialog:s Dial numbert Please say the numbers Zero one three zerot Zero one three zeros Five zero zero fivet Five zero zero fives Okayt Dialing number

i You can also dial the specified number ifyou press the 6 button on the multi-function steering wheel instead of theconcluding command “Okay”.

“Confirm”While you are entering a number, you can usethe “Confirm” command to have all thespoken digits repeated by voice control.Voice control will then prompt you tocontinue with the entry.Example of dialog:s Dial numbert Please say the numbers Zero one three zerot Zero one three zeros Confirmt Zero one three zero. Please continue.

Phone 189

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 192: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

s Five zero zero fivet Five zero zero fives Okayt Dialing number

i You can also dial the specified number ifyou press the 6 button on the multi-function steering wheel instead of theconcluding command Okay.

“Correction”While you are entering a number, you can usethe “Correction” command to correct theblock of digits last spoken. When you inputthis command, voice control deletes the lastblock of digits and repeats the digits input upto this point. Voice control will then promptyou to continue with the entry.Example of dialog:s Dial numbert Please say the numbers Zero one three zerot Zero one three zeros Five zero zero fivet Five zero zero fives Correctiont Zero one three zero. Please continue.s Five zero zero fivet Five zero zero fives Okayt Dialing number

“Delete”While you are entering a number, you can usethe “Delete” command to delete all the digitswhich have been entered. After you haveinput this command, voice control promptsyou to enter additional digits or commands.Example of dialog:s Dial numbert Please say the numbers Zero one three zero

t Zero one three zeros Five zero zero fivet Five zero zero fives Deletet Number deleted, please say the

number agains Zero three seven threet Zero three seven threes Three nine onet Three nine ones Okayt Dialing number

“Save Name” (Address Book)(Y page 198)

“Dial Name” (Address Book)(Y page 199)

“Delete Name” (Address Book)(Y page 199)

“Read out Phone Book” and “Dialing a Phone Number” You can use the “Read out phone book”command to listen to all entries in the phonebook in which a phone number is also storedand, if required, select an entry.Example of dialog:s Read out phone book

The system reads out all the addressbook entries with phone numbers. Ifthe list contains more than 30 entries,the system asks you to say the namefrom which the reading shall bestarted.

u The system shows the list of phonebook entries being read out.

X To select an entry: Press the ? buttonimmediately after the desired entry hasbeen read out.

190 PhoneVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 193: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

i If there is more than one phone numberfor an entry, voice control queries this.t Do you want to call Smith?s Homet Smith home. Dialing.X To cancel the dialog: Press the %

button.The system confirms by responding“Cancel”.

“Redial” You can use the “Redial” command to redialthe number most recently called.

Managing Announcement Services or Voice Mail You can also use voice control to manageyour voice mail or recorded announcementservices.X Press the ? button while a phone call is

in progress.An acoustic signal confirms that the systemis activated.

X Say the required digits (“zero” to “nine”).orX Say the required words “Star” or “Hash”.X Say the concluding command “Okay”.

The system dials the number entered.

Navigation

G Warning!For safety reasons, you should only select adestination when the vehicle is stationary.While the navigation system providesdirectional assistance, the driver must remainfocused on safe driving behavior, especiallypay attention to traffic and street signs, andshould utilize the system’s audio cues whiledriving.

The navigation system does not supply anyinformation on stop signs, yield signs, trafficregulations or traffic safety rules. Theirobservance always remains in the driver’spersonal responsibility. DVD maps do notcover all areas nor all routes within an area.Traffic regulations always have priority overany route recommendations given. Bear inmind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.During route guidance, you will not receiveinformation on:Rtraffic lightsRstop and yield signsRparking or stopping zonesRone-way streetsRnarrow bridgesRother traffic regulation data

You should therefore always strictly observetraffic regulations while driving. Drivecarefully and always obey traffic laws androad signs, even if they contradict navigationsystem instructions.

G Warning!Please do not use the Voice Control Systemin an emergency, as the tone of your voicemay change in a stressful situation. This couldcause a delay in completing your phone callin a timely manner. This could distract you inan emergency situation and cause you to beinvolved in an accident.

OperationYou can use voice control to:Renter a stateRenter a provinceRenter a cityRenter a district (center)

Navigation 191

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 194: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Renter a streetRenter an intersectionRenter a house numberRenter an entire addressRenter a zip codeRfind addressRenter a point of interestRselect one of your previous destinationsRcall up route informationRstore a destinationRdisplay the mapRenlarge/reduce the size of the mapRlisten to the destination memoryRstart and stop route guidanceRswitch the guidance instructions on and offX To select the navigation application press

the ? button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.

X Give the “Navigation” command.X Press the ? button.X Give one of the navigation commands

explained below.

Commands You cannot start the route guidance until allthe necessary address data has beenentered.

“Help Navigation”/“Help”Using the “Help navigation” command, youcan have all the essential commands for thenavigation system read out.

Entering an Address i If voice control fails to recognize your

entry, it is advisable to spell the name of

the town and street. Spell names of townsand streets when abroad.

The system guides you completely throughthe dialog to route guidance. As soon as avalid address is entered (at least the town),you can use the “Start route guidance”command to start the route guidance.

“Enter state”/“Enter province” You can use the “Enter state”/“Enterprovince” command to change the state orprovince setting of the navigation system.Example of dialog:s Enter statet Please enter the name of the stateu The system shows a numbered list of

possible state names on the display. Ifthere is only one entry on the list, voicecontrol asks if it is correct.

t Please select a line numbers Line number 1t Line number 1 accepted

“Enter Destination”You can use the “Enter destination”command to enter a complete address.The system guides you through the wholedialog. As soon as a valid address is entered(at least the town), you can use the “Startroute guidance” command to start the routeguidance.Example of dialog:s Enter destinationt Do you want to enter street first or

town first?s Townt Please say the name of the towns Albanyt Loading list of townsu The system shows a numbered list of

possible city names on the display. If

192 NavigationVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 195: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

there is only one entry on the list, voicecontrol asks if it is correct.

t Please select a line number.s Line number 1t Line number 1 acceptedt Would you like to enter a street?s Yest Please say the name of the streets Park Avenuet Loading list of streetsu The system shows a numbered list of

possible street names on the display.If there is only one entry on the list,voice control asks if it is correct.

t Please select a line numbers Line number 1t Line number 1 acceptedt Would you like to enter a house

number?s Not Would you like to start route guidance?s Yest Starting route guidanceThe system stores the selected destinationand starts route guidance.If you give one of the following commands,the system guides you through the dialog toroute guidance.

“Enter Town” You can use the “Enter town” command toenter any town in the state or province that iscurrently selected.

i If the city you require does not appear inthe list or the system fails to recognize thename of the town, it can be entered byusing the “Spell town” command.

i You can use the “Next page” or “Previouspage” commands to scroll through the list.You can use the “Correction” command toenter the name of the town again.

Example of dialog:s Enter townt Please say the name of the towns Albanyt Loading list of townsu The system shows a numbered list of

possible town names on the display. Ifthere is only one entry on the list, voicecontrol asks if it is correct.

t Please select a line numbers Line number 1t Line number 1 acceptedThe town is stored for route guidance.

“Spell town”Using the “Spell town” command, you canspell any town. This may be necessary ifcertain town or street names are notrecognized.Say the letters in the form of a continuousstring of letters. In the case of long names, itis not always necessary to spell the wholename. Usually only the first five to sevenletters are required.A list of city names will appear in the displayand you can choose the one you require.Say each individual letter clearly.It is not easy to avoid confusion ofsimilarsounding letters (e.g. D and E).Example of dialog:s Spell townt Please spell the towns F-R-E-N-St Loading list of townsu The system shows a numbered list of

city names on the displayt Please select a line numbers Number threet Number three acceptedThe town is stored for route guidance.

Navigation 193

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 196: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

i You can use the “Next page” or “Previouspage” commands to scroll through the list.You can use the “Correction” command tospell the town again from the beginning.

i Note that the list in the display is sortedaccording to the probability of voicerecognition.

“Enter District” (Center) You can use the “Enter district” command toenter an area in a city which you haveselected previously.Example of dialog:s Enter districtt Please say the name of the districts Manhattanu The system shows a numbered list of

districts in the display if the selectedcity has more than one district

t Please select a line numbers Line number 1t Line number 1 acceptedThe district is stored for route guidance.

“Enter Street” You can use the “Enter Street” command toenter the name of any street in the selectedcity.

i If only a few streets are stored for aselected town, they will be displayed forselection immediately after you give the“Enter Street” command.

Example of dialog:s Enter Streett Please say the name of the streets Mabel’s Streetu The system shows a numbered list of

street names on the displayt Please select a line numbers Number threet Number three accepted

The street name is stored for route guidance.

“Correction”If you have entered or spelled a city or street,you can use the “Correction” command toenter the city or street again or spell it fromthe beginning.

“Enter Intersection” You can use the “Intersection” command tospecify an intersection of two streets.

No street has been entered yetExample of dialog:s Enter Intersectiont Please say the name of the first streets Main streett Please select a line number or say

continues Number 1t Number 1 acceptedt Please say the name of the

intersecting streets Mable streett Please select a line number or say

continues Number 4t Number 4 acceptedt Do you want to start route guidance?s YesThe route guidance to the specifiedintersection is started.

A street has already been enteredExample of dialog:s Enter Intersectiont Please say the name of the

intersecting streets Mable streett Please select a line number or say

continues Number 4

194 NavigationVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 197: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

t Number 4 acceptedt Do you want to start route guidance?s YesThe route guidance to the specifiedintersection is started.

In connection with the "Enter Destination" dialogi You can enter an intersection instead of

a house number in the “Enter Destination”dialog.

Example of dialog (continues “EnterDestination” dialog):t Do want to enter a house number?s Enter Intersectiont Please say the name of the

intersecting streets Mable streett Please select a line number or say

continues Number 4t Number 4 acceptedt Do you want to start route guidance?s YesThe route guidance to the specifiedintersection is started.

“House Number” You can use the “House number” commandto specify the house number for the selectedstreet in individual digits.Example of dialog:s House numbert Please say the house number in single

digitss Three fourt Three fours OkayThe house number is stored for routeguidance.

“Points of interest” (POI) You can use the “Points of interest” commandto select specific destinations (gas stations,airports, stations, etc.).Example of dialog:s Point of interestu The system shows the following list in

the display:1. Current position2. Other City3. Other State4. Other Province

t Please select a line numbers Line number 1 ...t Line number 1 acceptedu The system shows a numbered list of

POI categoriest Please select a line number or say the

category names Line number 5u The system shows a numbered list

with destinations from the selectedcategory

t Please select a line numbers Line number 1t Line number 1 acceptedThe specific destination which has thenumber one is stored for route guidance.

i Depending on the selected area, otherlists may be shown.

You can only select points of interest in thestate or province the navigation system is setfor.

Selecting next point of interestYou can use the following commands toselect nearby points of interest:R“Next gas station”R“Next car park”R“Next Mercedes-Benz Service”

Navigation 195

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 198: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

R“Next restaurant”R“Next hospital”Example of dialog:s Next gas stationu The system shows a numbered list of

gas stations on the displayt Please select a line number.s Line number 1u Line number one accepted. Would you

like to start route guidance?s YesThe route guidance for this point of interestis started.ors Not Do you want to save the destination?s YesThe dialog continues as shown in the section“Save destination”.

“Last Destinations” You can use the “Last destinations”command to reselect a destination from a listof the previously selected destinations.Example of dialog:s Last destinationsu The system shows a numbered list of

the previously selected destinationst Please select a line numbers Line number 1u Line number one accepted. Would you

like to start route guidance?s YesThe route guidance for this destination isstarted.

“Save Destination” You can use the “Save destination” commandto save the current destination in the addressbook by means of a voice name.

i If the desired voice name already existsin the address book, the system asks if youwant to add the address.

Example of dialog:s Save destinationt Please say the names Smitht Please repeat the names Smitht Where would you like to save: home or

work?s Workt The destination has been saved.

“Find Address”You can use the “Find address” command toselect a previously saved address and startroute guidance.Example of dialog:s Find addresst Please say the names Smithu The system shows a numbered list of

saved addresses in the displayt Please select a line numbers Line number 1t Line number 1 acceptedt Smith. Starting route guidance.

“Start Route Guidance” When Route Guidance is inactive, you can usethe “Start route guidance” command to startroute guidance once a valid destination hasbeen entered.s Start route guidancet Starting route guidance

“Route Information”You can use the “Route information”command to have the following informationon your currently planned route read out:

196 NavigationVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 199: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RDistance to destinationRRemaining driving timeRExpected arrival time

“Guidance Instructions On”When you use the “Guidance instructions on”command, voice control repeats the lastdriving tip. If the driving tip output has beenswitched off up to this point, it is nowswitched on again.

“Guidance Instructions Off”You can use this command to switch off theroute guidance voice output.

“Cancel Route Guidance”You can use this command to stop routeguidance.Example of dialog:s Cancel route guidancet Are you sure you want to cancel route

guidance?s Yest Cancelling route guidanceVoice control cancels route guidance.ors Not Continuing route guidance.The dialog with voice control is terminated.Route guidance remains activated.

“Zoom In”/“Zoom Out”You can use these commands to zoom themap display one step in or out.

“Zoom In Completely”/“Zoom Out Completely”You can use these commands to set the mapdisplay directly to the smallest or largestscale.

“Read Out Destination Memory”You can use the “Read out destinationmemory” command to listen to the entriesfrom the address book’s destination memoryand, if required, navigate to one of them.Example of dialog:s Read out destination memory

The system reads out all entries, fromthe address book destination memory.If the list contains more than 30entries, the system asks you to say thename from which the reading shall bestarted.

i If you do not say a name, voice controlreads out all destination entries.

X To select an entry and set an address:Press the ? button at the selectedentry.t If there is more than one address, the

system asks “Navigate to: home orwork?”

s HomeThe system starts route guidance.X To cancel the dialog: Press the %

button.You have canceled the dialog. The systemconfirms by responding “Cancel”.

Address Book

G Warning!Please devote your attention first andforemost to the traffic situation you are in.Before your journey, please familiarizeyourself with the address book functions.Only use the Voice Control System when roadand traffic conditions permit you to do so.Otherwise you could be involved in anaccident in which you or others could beinjured.

Address Book 197

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 200: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

OverviewThe address book gives you the option ofstoring information about people in the formof entries.Using voice control, you can dial a phonenumber stored in the address book or startroute guidance for a stored address.Apart from the speaker-dependent voicenames stored in the address book, voicecontrol can recognize all the entries in thename fields of the address book. Recognitionof the entries in the address book depends onthe text that was entered. To make a call youmust say the text of the entry.Check the address book entries for thefollowing:RThe name entries, e.g. last name and first

name, are in the right fields.RDo not use abbreviations or acronyms.RAvoid unnecessary spaces in names.RDo not use special characters.You can improve voice recognition by savinga speaker-dependent voice name for addressbook entries.Use a speaker-dependent voice name:Rfor names which are difficult to pronounceRto distinguish names which sound similarRfor names which are not pronounced as

they are writtenVoice control can store up to 50 of theseaddress book entries by means of a speaker-dependent voice name.

OperationYou can use voice control at any time to:Rsave a nameRselect a nameRdelete a nameRlist the address bookRdelete the address book

Ropen the address bookRopen an entry from the address bookRlist the phone bookRlist the destination memoryX To open the address book: Press

the ? button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.

X Give the “Address book” command.X Press the ? button.X Give one of the address book commands

explained below.

Commands

“Address Book”X To open the address book: Say the

command “Address book”.

“Help Address Book”X Using the “Help address book” command,

you can have all the essential commandsfor the address book read out.

“Save Name” Use the “Save name” command to save aphone number with a voice name for aspecific speaker. Use this command for aname which is complicated or which ispronounced differently as it is spelled, forexample, because it is a foreign name. Whenyou have given the command “Save Name”,voice control prompts you to enter a phonenumber.The digits 0 to 9 and the word “Plus” arepermitted.“Plus” replaces the international dialing code,e.g. “00”.Say the phone number in the form of acontinuous string of digits or as blocks ofdigits, e.g. three to five digits.Voice control repeats the digits it recognizesafter each block of digits (with a pause of

198 Address BookVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 201: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

about half a second between each block ofdigits) and waits for you to continue speaking.When you have given the command “Okay”,voice control prompts you two or three timesto say the name. When repeating the name,make sure that you pronounce it in exactlythe same way as you did the first time.Otherwise, the name cannot be saved andvoice control aborts the saving procedure.Example of dialog:s Save namet Please say the numbers Zero one three zerot Zero one three zeros Five zero zero fivet Five zero zero fives Okayt Please say the name.s Smitht Please repeat the name.s Smitht Would you like to save the number in

a category?s Not Name and number saved

“Dial Name” You can use the “Dial name” command toplace a call by selecting a name from youraddress book. You can choose either a voicename or say a name entry.Only say the surname if only the surname isentered in the address book.Say the surname first and then the first nameif both are entered in the address book.Example of dialog:s Dial namet Please say the names Smith

If there is more than one phonenumber for an entry, voice controlqueries this:

t Do you want to make a work call or ahome call?orPlease select a line number

s Workt Smith work. Dialing number.

“Find Name” Use the “Find name” command to search fora name in the address book. Voice controlthen asks what action you want it to perform:for example call the selected number, startroute guidance to the saved address or openthe entry.Example of dialog:s Find namet Please say the names Smithu The system shows a numbered list in

the display.t Please select a line number.s Line number 1 ...t Line number 1 accepted.

The system opens the first entry on thelist.If the selected entry contains at leastone phone number or an address,voice control asks whether you wantto dial the number or navigate to thestored address.

“Find Address”(Y page 196)

“Delete Name”Use the “Delete name” command to delete avoice name from your address book.Example of dialog:s Delete namet Please say the names Smitht Do you want to delete Smith?

Address Book 199

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 202: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

s Yest The voice name has been deleted

“Read Out Address Book” You can use the “Read out address book”command to listen to all names and voicenames in the address book. You can select anentry during this.If no name is entered in the name field of theaddress book, the phone number or theaddress is read out. A name can be enteredlater in the name field.Example of dialog:s Read out address bookThe system reads out all address bookentries. If there are more than 30 entries, thesystem asks from which entry it should startthe reading.

i If you do not say a name, voice controlreads out all address book entries.

X To select an address book entry: Press the ? button at the selectedentry.The entry is selected and shown on thedisplay. Voice control asks whether theselected entry should be called, navigatedto or opened.

X To cancel the dialog:Press the % button.You have cancelled the dialog. The systemconfirms by responding “Cancel”.

“Delete Address Book”You can use the “Delete address book”command to delete individual voice names orall the voice names in the address book. Theaddress data is not deleted.

“Open Entry” You can use the “Open entry” command toopen any address book entry.Example of dialog:

s Open entryt Please say the names Smithu The system shows a numbered list in

the display.t Please select a line number.s Line number 1 ...t Line number 1 accepted.

The system opens the first entry on thelist.If the selected entry contains at leastone phone number or an address,voice control asks whether you wantto dial the number or navigate to thestored address.

“Spell Entry”You can use the “Spell entry“ command toopen any address book entry by spelling thename.Say the letters in the form of a continuousstring of letters (five to seven letters).A list of possible entries will appear in thedisplay and you can choose the one yourequire.Example of dialog:s Spell entryt Please spell the name.s S-M-I-T-Hu The system shows a numbered list in

the display.t Please select a line number.s Number fourt Number four accepted

The system opens the fourth entry onthe list.If the selected entry contains at leastone phone number or an address,voice control asks whether you wantto dial the number or navigate to thestored address.

i You can use the “Next page” or “Previouspage” commands to scroll through the list.

200 Address BookVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 203: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

You can use the “Correction” command tospell the name again.

Radio and Satellite Radio

G Warning!Please devote your attention first andforemost to the traffic situation you are in.Before your journey, please familiarizeyourself with the radio functions.Only use the Voice Control System when roadand traffic conditions permit you to do so.Otherwise you could be involved in anaccident in which you or others could beinjured.

OperationYou can use voice control to:Rselect the wavebandRfind a stationRselect a frequency (FM, AM)Rselect a category (Satellite radio)Rlisten to the station listRsave a voice name for a stationRdelete a station list (voice names only)Rdelete a station (voice name only)Rselect a channel number (Satellite radio)The names of all received and stored stationsare available for voice recognition. Toimprove voice recognition, you can store avoice name for a specific speaker.X To select the radio or satellite radio

application: Press the ? button on themultifunction steering wheel.

X Say the command Radio or Satellite Radio.

X Press the ? button.X Say one of the radio or satellite radio

commands explained below.

CommandsYou can always give the commands for theradio when you are listening to the radio, evenif a different application is shown on thedisplay.

“Help Radio”Using the “Help Radio” command, you canhave all the commands for the radio read out.

“Help Satellite Radio”Using the “Help Satellite Radio” command,you can have all the commands for thesatellite radio read out.

Selecting a WavebandYou can set the waveband with the followingcommands:R“FM”R“AM”

“Next Station”/“Previous Station” You can start manual tuning and set the nextstation using the following commands:R“Next station”R“Previous station”

“Next Category”/“Previous Category”You can use the following commands tochange the category on satellite radio:R“Next category”R“Previous category”

Selecting the Frequency (FM Range)You can select frequencies within the FMrange (87.7 to 107.9 MHz) directly. Voicecontrol also recognizes the words“frequency”, “point” and “megahertz”.Example of dialog:s Eighty seven point nine megahertzu Voice control sets the frequency.

Radio and Satellite Radio 201

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 204: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Selecting the Frequency (AM Range)You can select frequencies within the AMrange (530 to 1710 kHz) directly. Voicecontrol also recognizes the words“frequency” and “kilohertz”.Example of dialog:s Five hundred and thirty kilohertzu Voice control sets the frequency.

“Save Station”Using the “Save station” command you cangive a voice name to the station currentlyselected. You can also use this command toimprove voice recognition for difficult namesor if you want to use a name of your own. Youcould, for example, save a station with thename “Favorite station”.When you have given the command, voicecontrol prompts up to three times to say thestation name. When repeating the stationname, make sure that you pronounce it inexactly the same way as you did the first time.Otherwise, the name cannot be saved andvoice control aborts the saving procedure.Example of dialog:s Save stationt Please say the station names Favorite stationt Please repeat the station name.s Favorite stationt The station has been saved.

“Select Station” Using the “Select station” command, you canselect a station.Example of dialog:s Select stationt Please say the station names Favorite stationu Voice control sets the station

“Station 'Favorite Station'”Using this command, you can select a station.Example of dialog:s Station 'Favorite station'u Voice control sets the station 'Favorite

station'

“Select Category” (Satellite radio) Using the “Select category” command, youcan select an available category.Example of dialog:s Select categoryt Please say the category names Newsu Voice control sets the category

“Category News” (Satellite Radio)Use this command to select a satellite radiocategory.Example of dialog:s Category newsu Voice control sets the category

“Enter Channel Number” (Satellite Radio) Use the command “Enter channel number” toselect a satellite radio category.

“Read Out Station List” and “Selecting a Station”Using the “Read out station list” command,you can hear a list of all receivable stationsand choose one from your station list.

i If voice control does not recognize thestation name, have it read out the list ofstations. This allows you to check whetheryou have saved the station you require inthe station list.

Example of dialog:s Read out station listThe system reads out the station list.

202 Radio and Satellite RadioVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 205: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

If the station you require is read out:X Press the ? button.

The system sets the correspondingfrequency.

X To cancel the dialog: Press the %button.You have cancelled the dialog. The systemconfirms by responding “Cancel”.

“Delete Station”You can use the “Delete station” command todelete a voice name for a station from yourstation list.Example of dialog:s Delete stationt Which station name do you want to

delete?s Favorite stationt Do you want to delete 'Favorite

station'?s Yest Station deleted.

“Delete Station List”You can use the “Delete station list”command to delete all voice names orindividual ones from your station list.Example of dialog:s Delete station listt Would you like to delete all voice

names from the station list?s Yest Are you sure?s Yest All voice names have been deleted

from the station listu The system permanently deletes all

voice names in the station list.ors NoThe system reads out the list of stations.

When the system reads out the stations to bedeleted:X Press the ? button.

The station to be deleted is selected. Thesystem reads out the selected stationagain.t Do you want to delete 'Favorite

station'?s Yest Station deletedu The system deletes the station and

reads out the remaining entries in thestation list.or

s NoThe system continues to read out the list ofstations.

DVD Changer

G WarningPlease devote your attention first andforemost to the traffic situation you are in.Before your journey, please familiarizeyourself with the disc functions.Only use the Voice Control System when roadand traffic conditions permit you to do so.Otherwise you could be involved in anaccident in which you or others could beinjured.

OperationYou can use voice control to:Rselect a CD/DVDRselect a trackRselect a directory in MP3 operationRselect a group in DVD Audio operation

i On the command “Next/previous CD/DVD”, the DVD changer changes from oneCD/ DVD to the next, skipping any emptycompartments. If you select an empty

DVD Changer 203

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 206: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

compartment with the “CD/DVD 1 to CD/DVD 6” command, the currentcompartment remains selected.

X To select the CD application: Pressthe ? button.

X Say one of the following commands:R“CD player/CD changer”R“DVD audio”R“DVD video”R“MP3”

X Press the ? button.X Give one of the CD or DVD commands

explained below.

Commands

“Help CD”/“Help DVD”/“Help MP3”With the commands:R“Help CD”R“Help DVD audio”R“Help DVD video”R“Help MP3”you can have all the commands for the CD,DVD or MP3 read out.

“Next CD/DVD”With the “Next CD”/“Next DVD” commands,you can select the next Audio CD/ DVD fromyour DVD changer.

“Track 1” to “Track 99”With the “Track 1” to “Track 99” commands,you can select a track number from theinserted CD/DVD.

“Next Track” You can use the “Next track” command toselect the next track.

“Previous Track”With the “Previous track” or “Repeat track”commands, you can have the track justplayed repeated. If the command is spokenas the first few seconds of the track areplayed, the previous track is selected.

“Group 1” to “Group 9”With the “Group 1” to “Group 9” commands,you can select a group on an inserted AudioDVD.

“Next Group”/“Previous Group”With the “Next group”/“Previous group”commands, you can select the next orprevious group on the inserted Audio DVD.

“Next Folder”/“Previous Folder”With the “Next folder”/“Previous folder”commands, you can select a folder on theinserted CD/DVD in MP3 mode.

“Memory Card” With the “Memory card” command, you canswitch to the PCMCIA card on the COMANDsystem.

“DVD Video” With the “DVD video” command, you can starta Video DVD on the COMAND system.

“Music Register” With the “Music register” command, you canchange to the internal music register (harddisk) of COMAND.

“Media Interface” With the “Media interface” command, youcan change to the external device that isconnected to the media interface ofCOMAND.

204 DVD ChangerVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 207: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

External Equipment (Aux)

“Audio Aux”You can use the “Audio Aux” command toactivate the Aux input.

Command List

In the Command list section, you will find allthe main commands for operating voicecontrol. The commands available to youdepend on the vehicle’s equipment.

i Some functions have several voicecommands to facilitate operation. Theseare grouped together between theseparator lines in the list and can be usedinterchangeably.

General Commands

RYesRCorrectROkay

RCancel

RNo

RPause

RAddress book

RMP3

RCD changer

RCD

RNavigationRRoute guidanceRNav

RDVD video

RDVD audio

RRadio

RSatellite radio / Sirius

RPhone

RMessages

RVideo

RCorrectionRWrongRIncorrect

RHelp

RHelp functionsRHelp devices

RHelp voice control [system]RHelp voice control/voice control helpRGeneral help

R0 – 9 (Numbers)

Ra – z (Letters of the alphabet)

RContinueRGo forwardRNext page

RPrevious pageRGo backRBack

RHelp radio

RHelp phone/help telephone

RHelp address book

RHelp CD changer

RHelp DVDRHelp DVD changer

Command List 205

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 208: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RHelp DVD audioRHelp DVD audio changer

RHelp MP3RHelp MP3 changer

RHelp navigationRHelp route guidanceRHelp nav

Phone Commands

RPhoneRTelephone on/phone on

RSaveRSave nameRSave numberRSave phone number

RDial numberRDial phone number

RConfirmRConfirm numberRConfirm phone number

RList phone bookRRead out phone book

RRedialRRedial last numberRRedial last phone number

RCorrectionRIncorrectRWrong numberRWrong phone number

RDeleteRDelete nameRDelete phone number

Navigation Commands

RNavigationRRoute guidanceRNav

RGuidance/ route guidance instructionsonRSwitch guidance/ route guidance

instructions onRListen to guidance/ route guidance

instructions

RGuidance/ route guidance instructionsoffRSwitch off guidance/ route guidance

instructionsRMute guidance/ route guidance

instructions

RHouse numberREnter house number

RMapRShow mapRMap on/switch on map

RZoom inRZoom in on map

RZoom outRZoom out of map

206 Command ListVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 209: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RZoom out completely

RZoom in completely

REnter stateRChange stateREnter provinceRChange provinceREnter destination areaRAnother state

RLast destinations

REnter townREnter name of town

RSpell townRSpell name of town

RDistrictREnter districtRCenterREnter center

RSpell districtRSpell center

REnter intersectionRIntersection

RPoint(s) of interest/POI(s)REnter point(s) of interest/POI(s)

RStreetREnter streetRName of streetREnter name of street

RSpell streetRSpell name of street

REnter destination

RSave destinationRSave address

RStart route guidance/routing/destination guidanceRBegin route guidanceRBegin destination guidanceRContinue route guidance/destination

guidance

RCancel route guidance/navigation/nav/destination guidanceRExit route guidance/navigation/nav/

destination guidanceRStop route guidance/navigation/ nav/

destination guidanceRTerminate route guidance/navigation/

nav/destination guidance

RNext gas station

RNext Mercedes-Benz ServiceRNext workshopRNext MB service

RNext hospital

RNext car park

RNext restaurant

Address Book Commands

RAddress book

RRead out/play address bookRList address book

RDelete address book

RSpell entryRSpell name

RFind entry

Command List 207

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 210: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RDelete name

RRead out/play destination memoryRList destination memory

R<voice_name_tu>

R<voice_name_ad> carR<voice_name_ad> car phone

R<voice_name_ad> landlineR<voice_name_ad> landline phone

R<voice_name_ad> mobileR<voice_name_ad> mobile phoneR<voice_name_ad> phone

R<voice_name_ad> workR<voice_name_ad> home

RWorkROfficeRCompany/business

RCarRCar phone

RLandlineRLandline phone

RMobileRMobile phone

RWork carRWork car phoneRCar phone work/office/business/

company

RWork/office/business/company/landlineRWork/office/business/company/

landline telephone/phoneRLandline telephone/phone work/office/

business/company

RWork/office/business/company/mobileRWork/office/business/company/

phoneRMobile phone work/office/business/

company

RHome

RHome carRHome car phoneRCar phone home

RHome landlineRHome landline telephone/phoneRLandline telephone/phone home

RHome mobileRHome mobile phoneRMobile phone home

RDial name

RSave nameRSave numberRSave telephone/phone number

RAcceptRAccept nameRAccept phone numberROkayRFinished

R<1> – <6>RSelect 1 – select 6RNumber 1 – number 6

Audio and Video Commands

RAudio

208 Command ListVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 211: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Radio

RRadio on

R87 7 megahertz - 107 9 megahertzR87 point 7 to 107 point 9R87 point 7 megahertz to 107 point 9

megahertzRFrequency 87 7 to frequency 107 9RFrequency 87 point 7 to frequency 107

point 9RFrequency 87 point 7 megahertz to

frequency 107 point 9 megahertz

RFM

RAM

RWeatherband

RNext stationROther stationRStation search

RStation <voice_name>

RDelete station

RSave station

RSelect station

RList station listRRead out station list

RDelete station list

RPrevious stationRLast station

Satellite Radio (SIRIUS XM)

RSatellite Radio on/SIRIUS on

RNext stationROther channel

RChannel <voice_name>

RDelete channel

RSave channel

RSelect channel

RList channel listRRead out channel list

RDelete channel list

RLast channelRPrevious station

RNext categoryRPrevious category

RCategory <category name>

RSelect category

RList category listRRead out category list

RPrevious categoryRLast category

CD Changer

RCD changer

RNext CDROther CD

RPrevious CDRLast CD

Command List 209

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 212: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RNext trackROther track

RPrevious trackRLast trackRRepeat/replay track

RCD 1 to CD 6RCD number 1 to CD number 6

RTrack 1 to Track 99RTrack number 1 to Track number 99

MP3

RMP3RMP3 changer (on)

RNext MP3ROther MP3

RPrevious MP3RLast MP3RRepeat/replay MP3

RNext directoryROther directory

RPrevious directoryRLast directory

RNext trackROther track

RPrevious trackRLast trackRRepeat/replay track

RTrack 1 to Track 99RTrack number 1 to Track number 99

RMP3 1 to MP3 6RMP3 number 1 to MP3 number 99

Music Register

RMusic registerRHard disk

Memory Card

RMemory card

DVD Audio

RDVD audioRDVD audio changer on

RNext DVD audioROther DVD audio

RPrevious DVD audioRLast DVD audio

RNext directoryROther directory

RPrevious directoryRLast directory

RNext groupROther group

RPrevious groupRLast group

RGroup 1 to 9RGroup number 1 to 9

210 Command ListVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 213: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

RNext trackROther track

RPrevious trackRLast trackRRepeat/replay track

RTrack 1 to Track 99RTrack number 1 to Track number 99

RDVD audio 1 to DVD audio 6RDVD audio number 1 to DVD audio

number 6

Media interface

RMedia interface

Aux

Audio aux

Video

RVideoRDVD video

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause/Consequence

Suggested Solutions

Voice control doesnot understandyou.

You have notoperated thesystem from thedriver’s seat.

X Only operate the system from the driver’sseat.

You have spokentoo exaggeratedly,too loudly or tooquietly.

X State the commands coherently and clearlywithout exaggerating.

Troubleshooting 211

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 214: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Problem Possible Cause/Consequence

Suggested Solutions

An address bookentry without aspeaker-dependent voicename is notrecognized.

The fields in theaddress book entryfor the last nameand first name areboth filled in, butyou only said thefirst name or thelast name.

X Say the last name and then the first name ofthe address book entry in full.

The names enteredin the addressbook do not soundsufficientlydifferent, or are notpronounced asthey are written.

X Make sure the address book entries areplausible.

Check the address book entries for thefollowing:RThe name entries, e.g. last name and first

name, are in the right fields.RDo not use abbreviations or acronyms.RAvoid unnecessary spaces in names.RDo not use special characters.

An address bookentry without aspeaker-dependent voicename is notrecognized.

The names enteredin the addressbook do not soundsufficientlydifferent, or are notpronounced asthey are written.

X Create a speaker-dependent voice name.orX Give the “Read out address book” command.

The system reads out the address book.X Press the ? button when the name you

want is read out.

The sound of thevoice names in theaddress book is notsufficientlydifferent.

X The voice names entered in the address bookmust sound as different as possible, e.g. storethe names White and Wright as “Mr Whiteoffice” and “Mr Wright John”.

orX Give the “Read out address book” command.

The system reads out the address book.X Press the ? button when the name you

want is read out.

212 TroubleshootingVo

ice

Cont

rol

Page 215: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Problem Possible Cause/Consequence

Suggested Solutions

A station list entryis not recognized.

The voice namesfor the stations inthe address bookdo not soundsufficientlydifferent.

X Save a speaker-dependent voice name for thestation (Y page 198)

orX Give the “Read out station list” command.

The system reads out the station list.X Press the ? button when the station you

want is read out.The station is selected.

If you are makingspeaker-dependent voicenames, the systemprompts you toenter them severaltimes.

The two voicenames differ fromeach other.

X Say the voice name with the same intonationboth times.

Help Function Voice control has a comprehensive helpfunction to assist the user.The voice control help function provides:Rgeneral information about how best to

operate voice controlRa list of the possible commands

“Help Voice Control”You can use the “Help Voice Control”command to obtain information about howbest to operate voice control.

“Help”If you press the ? button and say thecommand “Help”, you will receive help for theapplication currently selected.If you select the “Help” command during avoice dialog, for example after the “Dialnumber” command, you will receive helpexplaining how the dialog continues.

You can also request the help function for aspecific system, for example with the “Helpphone” command.If you have activated the help window, you willsee a selection of the possible commands onthe display (Y page 42).

Troubleshooting 213

Voic

e Co

ntro

l

Z

Page 216: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

214

Page 217: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Overview ............................................ 216Emergency Calls ............................... 216Roadside Assistance ........................ 216Information Calls .............................. 217Search & Send ................................... 217

215

Tele

Aid

Page 218: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Overview

Vehicle Equipmenti This Operator’s Manual describes all

features, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

The Tele Aid System

(Tele Aid – Telematic Alarm Identification onDemand)The Tele Aid system offers a variety ofservices, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergencyRRoadside AssistanceRInformationRSearch & Send

Emergency Calls

AutomaticallyAn emergency call is initiated automaticallyfollowing an accident in which the emergencytensioning devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy.

Initiating an Emergency Call ManuallyX Briefly press SOS button cover to open.X Press SOS button (for longer than 2

seconds).The indicator lamp in the SOS button willflash until the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theResponse Center.

X Close cover after the emergency call isconcluded.

i During the emergency call messageEmergency Call Connected is displayed,operation from COMAND is not possible.

For a complete description and additionalinformation on Emergency calls please referto the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Roadside Assistance

The Roadside Assistance button F islocated in the overhead control panel.

X Press and hold Roadside Assistance ButtonF (for longer than 2 seconds).A call to a Mercedes-Benz RoadsideAssistance dispatcher will be initiated. Thebutton will flash while the call is in progress.

X Describe the nature of the need forassistance.

For a complete description and additionalinformation on Roadside Assistance callsplease refer to the vehicle Operator's Manual.

216 Roadside AssistanceTe

le A

id

Page 219: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Information Calls

The Information button ï is located in theoverhead control panel.

X Press and hold Information button ï(for longer than 2 seconds).A call to the Customer Assistance Centerwill be initiated. The button will flash whilethe call is in progress. The operator in theCustomer Assistance Center can downloada destination (e.g service center) to yourCOMAND system, which you can use fornavigation as described in the section“Search & Send” (Y page 217).

For a complete description and additionalinformation on Information calls please referto the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Search & Send

i In order to utilize Search & Send yourvehicle must be equipped with Tele Aid,Navigation, and an active Tele Aidsubscription.

“Search & Send” is a navigation destinationaddress entry service. A destination addresslocated using Google Maps® or Yahoo LocalMaps® websites can be delivered via Tele Aiddirectly to the Navigation system in yourvehicle.

Specify and Send a Destination Address

i Please refer to any specific instructionsprovided by either website regardingentering or sending an address. Eachwebsite functions differently and is subjectto change.

X Go to maps.google.com ormaps.yahoo.com and enter a destinationaddress in the address entry field.

X Depending on which website you are using,click on the appropriate button to send thedestination address to your Tele Aidaccount email address.

X Enter the email address you specified whenyou activated your Tele Aid account in theappropriate field when the “Send” dialogbox appears.

X Click “Send”.

Retrieve Destination AddressX Press the Tele Aid Information buttonï to begin the download of thedestination address to your vehicle'snavigation system.

i If you have sent more than onedestination address to your vehicle youmust make one Information Call for eachdestination address download.

X Select Yes when the message appearsasking if you would like to start navigation.

Search & Send 217

Tele

Aid

Z

Page 220: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

This will open the start navigation screen(Y page 70).

X Select Start.orX Select No if you wish to save the

downloaded destination address in theFrom Memory destination list for futureuse.

i Destination addresses will download inthe same order they were sent. If you havemultiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles equippedwith Tele Aid and active accounts, eachdestination address sent will be retrievableby all vehicles associated with the e-mailaddress you specified for your Tele Aidaccount.

218 Search & SendTe

le A

id

Page 221: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

219

Page 222: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

220

Page 223: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

We reserve the right to modify the technicaldetails of the COMAND system as given in thedata and illustrations of this Operator’sManual.Press time: 05/10/2009Reprinting, translation and copying, even ofexcerpts, is not permitted without priorauthorization in writing.

Page 224: COMAND - Mercedes-Benz USA · PDF fileWelcome to COMAND! Please make yourself familiar with your COMAND control unit and read the ... GSM network coverage ..... 98 H Hands-free

Order no. 6515 6833 13 Part no. 212 584 18 81 Edition A 2010